Skip to main content

Full text of "Memory; a contribution to experimental psychology"

See other formats


00 


CO 


Columbia 
teachers  College 

Educational  IReprints 

'      Wo.  3 


MEMORY 


A  CONTRIBUTION  TO  EXPERIMENTAL 
PSYCHOLOGY 


BY 

HERMANN  EBBINGHAUS 

PRIVAT  DOCENT  IN  PHILOSOPHY  AT  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  BERLIN 

(1885) 

De  subjecto  vetustissimo 
novissimam  promovemus  scienttam" 

TRANSLATED  BY 

HENRY  A.  RUGER,  Pn.D. 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSOR  OF  EDUCATIONAL  PSYCHOLOGY,  TEACHERS 
COLLEGE,  COLUMBIA  UNIVERSITY 

AND 

CLARA  E.  BUSSENIUS 


PUBLISHED  BY 

flfolkgr,  Ctttmbte  Ihmir rmti; 
NEW  YORK  CITY 
1913 


Lb 
i  06,3 


602497 


TRANSLATORS'  INTRODUCTION 

The  publication  by  Ebbinghaus  of  the  results  of  his  experi- 
mental investigation  of  memory  (1885)  marks  the  application  of 
precise  scientific  method  to  the  study  of  the  "  higher  mental  pro- 
cesses." By  his  invention  of  nonsense  syllables  as  the  material  to 
be  thus  employed  Ebbinghaus  signalised  the  growing  independ- 
ence of  experimental  psychology  from  physics  and  physiology. 
For  educational  psychology  his  work  is  of  especial  importance 
because  the  field  in  which  he  worked  was  that  of  the  ideational 
processes  and  because  the  problems  which  he  attacked  were 
functional  and  dynamic.  The  problem  of  the  most  efficient  dis- 
tribution of  repetitions  in  committing  material  to  memory  may 
be  taken  to  illustrate  the  identity  in  the  nature  of  the  questions 
investigated  by  him  and  those  of  especial  interest  to  us  to-day. 
Despite  the  fact  that  his  experiments  were  performed  only  on 
himself  and  that  the  numerical  results  obtained  are  consequently 
limited  in  significance,  his  work  stands  as  an  embodiment  of 
the  essentials  of  scientific  method.  On  account  of  its  historical 
importance  and  also  because  of  its  intrinsic  relation  to  present 
day  problems  and  methods  Ebbinghaus's  investigation  should 
be  known  as  directly  as  possible  by  all  serious  students  of  psy- 
chology. To  facilitate  this  acquaintance  is  the  purpose  of  this 
translation. 

The  translators  wish  to  acknowledge  their  indebtedness  to 
Professors  Edward  L.  Thorndike,  Robert  S.  Woodworth,  and 
E.  W.  Bagster-Collins  of  Columbia  University,  to  Professor 
Walter  Dill  Scott  of  Northwestern  University  and  to  Mrs.  H.  A. 
Ruger  for  assistance  in  revising  manuscript  and  proof. 


in 


AUTHOR'S  PREFACE 

In  the  realm  of  mental  phenomena,  experiment  and  measure-  i 
ment  have  hitherto  been  chiefly  limited  in  application  to  sense 
perception  and  to  the  time  relations  of  mental  processes.  By 
means  of  the  following  investigations  we  have  tried  to  go  a  step 
farther  into  the  workings  of  the  mind  and  to  submit  to  an 
experimental  and  quantitative  treatment  the  manifestations  of 
memory.  The  term,  memory,  is  to  be  taken  here  in  its  broadest 
sense,  including  Learning,  Retention,  Association  and  Repro- 
duction. 

The  principal  objections  which,  as  a  matter  of  course,  rise 
against  the  possibility  of  such  a  treatment  are  discussed  in 
detail  in  the  text  and  in  part  have  been  made  objects  of  investi- 
gation. I  may  therefore  ask  those  who  are  not  already  convinced 
a  priori  of  the  impossibility  of  such  an  attempt  to  postpone 
their  decision  about  its  practicability. 

The  author  will  be  pardoned  the  publication  of  preliminary 
results  in  view  of  the  difficulty  of  the  subject  investigated  and 
the  time-consuming  character  of  the  tests.  Justice  demands 
that  the  many  defects  due  to  incompleteness  shall  not  be  raised 
as  objections  against  such  results.  The  tests  were  all  made  upon 
myself  and  have  primarily  only  individual  significance.  Naturally 
they  will  not  reflect  exclusively  mere  idiosyncrasies  of  my  mental 
organisation;  if  the  absolute  values  found  are  throughout  only 
individual,  yet  many  a  relation  of  general  validity  will  be  found 
in  the  relation  of  these  numbers  to  each  other  or  in  the  relations 
of  the  relations.  But  where  this  is  the  case  and  where  it  is 
not,  I  can  hope  to  decide  only  after  finishing  the  further  and 
comparative  experiments  with  which  I  am  occupied. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 

Chapter  Page 

Preface   . .        .  v 

I.  OUR    KNOWLEDGE    CONCERNING    MEMORY        ....  i 

Section    i.  Memory  in  its  Effects i 

2.  Memory  in  its  Dependence       ....  3 

3.  Deficiencies     in     our     Knowledge     concerning 

Memory         .......  4 

II.  THE  POSSIBILITY  OF  ENLARGING  OUR  KNOWLEDGE  OF  MEMORY  7 

Section    4.  The  Method  of  Natural  Science       ...  7 

5.  The  Introduction  of  Numerical  Measurements 

for  Memory  Contents     .....  8 

6.  The  Possibility  of  Maintaining  the  Constancy 

of  Conditions  Requisite  for  Research    .         .  it 

7.  Constant  Averages    .         .         .         .                 .  12 

8.  The   Law   of    Errors 15 

9.  Resume      .         .         .         .         .        .         .         .  19 

"        10.  The    Probable    Error 30 

III.  THE  METHOD  OF  INVESTIGATION    .        .        .        .        .        .  22 

Section  n.  Series  of  Nonsense  Syllables  23 

12.  Advantages  of  the  Material     .         .         .         .  23 

13.  Establishment  of   the  Most  Constant  Experi- 

mental Conditions  Possible  .         .         .         .  24 

14.  Sources  of  Error 26 

15.  Measurement  of  Work  Required      ...  30 
"        16.  Periods  of  the  Tests 33 

IV.  THE  UTILITY  OF  THE  AVERAGES  OBTAINED    .        .        .        .  34 

Section  17.  Grouping  of  the  Results  of  the  Tests        .         .  34 

"        18.  Grouping  of  the  Results  of  the  Separate  Series  41 

V.  RAPIDITY  OF  LEARNING  SERIES  OF  SYLLABLES  AS  A  FUNCTION  \/ 

OF  THEIR  LENGTH       .......  46 

Section  19.  Tests  Belonging  to  the  Later  Period        .         .  46 

20.  Tests  Belonging  to  the  Earlier  Period     .         .  49 

21.  Increase  in  Rapidity  of  Learning  in  the  Case 

of  Meaningful   Material        ....  50 

VI.  RETENTION  AS  A  FUNCTION  OF  THE  NUMBER  OF  REPETITIONS  52    ^ 

Section  22.  Statement  of  the  Problem        .         .         .        .  52 

23.  The  Tests  and  their  Results     ....  54 

24.  The    Influence    of    Recollection         .         .         .  58 

25.  The    Effect    of    a    Decided    Increase    in    the 

Number   of   Repetitions        ....  59 

vii 


viii  Table  of  Contents 

Chapter  Page 

VII.  RETENTION  AND  OBLIVISCENCE  AS  A  FUNCTION  OF  THE  TIME  62 

Section  26.  Explanations  of  Retention  and  Obliviscence   .  62 

"        27.  Methods  of  Investigation  of  Actual  Conditions  65 

28.  Results 67 

"       29.  Discussion  of  Results        .....  76 

"        30.  Control   Tests 79 

VIII.  RETENTION  AS  A  FUNCTION  OF  REPEATED  LEARNING        .        .  81 

Section  31.  Statement  of  the  Problem  and  the  Investigation  81 

"        32.  Influence  of  the  Length  of  the  Series        .         .  84 

"        33.  Influence  of  Repeated  Learning       ...  85 

"        34.  Influence  of  the  Separate  Repetitions       .         .  87 

IRRETENTION  AS  A  FUNCTION  OF  THE  ORDER  OF  SUCCESSION  OF 

THE   MEMBERS   OF  THE   SERIES        .....  90 
Section  35.  Association    according   to    Temporal    Sequence 

and  its  Explanation       .....  90 

36.  Methods  of   Investigation  of  Actual  Behavior  95 

37.  Results.     Associations  of  Indirect  Sequence     .  99 

38.  Experiments  with  Exclusion  of  Knowledge       .  101 

39.  Discussion  of  Results        .....  106 

40.  Reverse  Associations         .         .         .         .         .no 

41.  The    Dependence    of   Associations    of    Indirect 

Sequence  upon  the  Number  of  Repetitions     .  114 

42.  Indirect  Strengthening  of  Associations     .         .  117 


MEMORY 

CHAPTER  I 


Section  i.    Memory  in  its  Effects 

The  language  of  life  as  well  as  of  science  in  attributing  a 
memory  to  the  mind  attempts  to  point  out  the  facts  and  their 
interpretation  somewhat  as  follows: 

Mental  states  of  every  kind,— sensations,  feelings, .  ideas, —  { 
which  were  at  one  time  present  Jn  consciousness  and  then  have . 
disappeared  from  it.  have  not  with  their  disappearance  absolutely 
ceased  to  exist.  Although  the  inwardly-turned  look  may  no 
longer  be  able  to  find  them,  nevertheless  they  have  not  been 
utterly  destroyed  and  annulled,  but  in  a  certain  manner  they, 
continue  to  exfet,  sjoreiTul^jro  to  speak,  .in.  the  memory.  We 
cannot^of  course,  directly  observe_their  present  existence,  but 
it  is  revealed  by  the  effects  which  come  to  our  knowledge  with 
a  certainty  like  that  with  which  we  infer  the  existence  of  the 
stars  below  the  horizon.  These  effects  are  of  different  kinds. 

In  a  first  group  of  cases  we  can  call  back  into  conscious- 
ness by  an  exertion  of  the  will  directed  to  this  purpose  the 
seemingly  lost  states  (or,  indeed,  in  case  these  consisted  in  imme- 
diate sense-perceptions,  we  can  recall  their  true  memory  images)  : 
that  is,  we  can  reproduce  them  voluntarily.  During  attempts  of 
this  sort, — that  is,  attempts  to  recollect— all  sorts  of  images 
toward  which  our  aim  was  not  directed,  accompany  the  desired 
images  to  the  light  of  consciousness.  Often,  indeed,  the  latter 
entirely  miss  the  goal,  but  as  a  general  thing  among  the  repre-  ^ 
sentations  is  found  the  one  which  we  sought,  and  it  is  imme-  \ 
diately  recognised  as  something  formerly  experienced.  It  would 
be  absurd  to  suppose  that  our  will  has  created  it  anew  and,  as 
it  were,  out  of  nothing;  it  must  have  been  present  somehow 

i 


2  Memory 

or  somewhere.     The   will,   so   to   speak,   has   only   discovered 
it  and  brought  it  to  us  again. 

In  a  second  group  of  cases  this  survival  is  even  more  striking. 
Often,  even  after  years,  mental  states  once  present  in  conscious- 
ness return  to  it  with  apparent  spontaneity  and  without  any  act 
of  the  will;  that  is,  they  are  reproduced^  involuntarily.  Here, 
also,  in  the  majority  of  cases  we  at  once  recognise  the  returned 
mental  state  as  one  that  has  already  been  experienced;  that  is, 
we  remember  it.  Under  certain  conditions,  however,  this  ac- 
companying consciousness  is  lacking,  and  we  know  only  indi- 
rectly that  the  "  now  "  must  be  identical  with  the  "  then  " ;  yet 
we  receive  in  this  way  a  no  less  valid  proof  for  its  existence 
during  the  intervening  time.  As  more  exact  observation  teaches 
us,  the  occurrence  of  these  involuntary  reproductions  is  not  an 
entirely  random  and  accidental  one.  On  the  contrary  they  are 

j^    brought  about  through  the  instrumentality  of  other,  immediately 
present  mental  images.     Moreover  they  occur  in  certain  regular 
ways  which  in  general  terrns  are  described  under  the  so-called 
ffrAlaws  of  association^— 

Finally  there  is  a  third  and  large  group  to  be  reckoned  with 
here.  The  vanished  mental  states  give  indubitable  proof  of  their 
continuing  existence  .even  if  they  themselves  do  not  return  to 

V     consciousness  at  all,  or  at  least  not  exactly  at  the  given  time. 
Employment  of  a  certain  range  of  thought  facilitates  under  cer-, 
tain  conditions  the  employment  of  a  similar  range  of  thought, 
even  if  the  former  does  not  come  before  the  mind  directly  either 
in  its  methods  or  in  its  results.    The  boundless  domain  of  the 

\  effect  of  accumulated  experiences  belongs  here.  This  effect 
results  from  the  frequent  conscious  occurrence  of  any  condi- 
tion or  process,  and  consists  in  facilitating  the  occurrence  and 
progress  of  similar  processes.  This  effect  is  not  fettered  by 
the  condition  that  the  factors  constituting  the  experience  shall 
return  in  toto  to  consciousness.  This  may  incidentally  be  the 
case  with  a  part  of  them;  it  must  not  happen  to  a  too  great 
extent  and  with  too  great  clearness,  otherwise  the  course  of  the 
present  process  will  immediately  be  disturbed.  Most  of  these 
experiences  remain  concealed  from  consciousness  and  yet  pro- 
duce an  effect  which  is  significant  and  which  authenticates  their 
previous  existence. 


Our  Knowledge  Concerning  Memory  3 

Section  2.     Memory  in  its  Dependence 

Along'  with  this  bare  knowledge  of  the  existence  of  memory 
and  its  effects,  there  is  abundant  knowledge  concerning  the 
conditions  upon  which  depend  the  vitality  of  that  inner  survnljal' 
as  well  as  the  fidelity  and  promptness  of  the  reproduction.  \\ 

How  differently  do  different  individuals  behave  in  this 
respect!  One  retains  and  reproduces  well;  another,  poorly. 
And  not  only  does  this  comparison  hold  good  when  different 
individuals  are  compared  with  each  other,  but  also  when  different 
phases  of  the  existence  of  the  same  individual  are  compared: 
morning  and  evening,  youth  and  old  age,  find  him  different  in/ 
this  respect. 

Differences  in  the  content  of  the  thing  to  be  reproduced  are  \ 
of  great  influence.  Melodies  may  become  a  source  of  torment  _'_ 
by  the  undesired  persistency  of  their  return.  Forms  and  colors 
are  not  so  importunate;  and  if  they  do  return,  it  is  with  notice- 
able loss  of  clearness  and  certainty.  The  musician  writes  for  the 
orchestra  what  his  inner  voice  sings  to  him;  the  painter  rarely 
relies  without  disadvantage  solely  upon  the  images  which  his 
inner  eye  presents  to  him;  nature  gives  him  his  forms,  study1 
governs  his  combinations  of  them.  It  is  with  something  of  a 
struggle  that  past  states  of  feeling  are  realized;  when  realized, 
and  this  is  often  only  through  the  instrumentality  of  the  move- 
ments which  accompanied  them,  they  are  but  pale  shadows  of 
themselves.  Emotionally  true  singing  is  rarer  than  technically 
correct  singing. 

If  the  two  foregoing  points  of  view  are  taken  together — 
differences  in  individuals  and  Differences  in  content — an  endless 
number  of  differences  come  to  light.  One  individual  overflows 
with  poetical  reminiscences,  another  directs  symphonies  from 
memory,  while  numbers  and  formulae,  which  come  to  a  third 
without  effort,  slip  away  from  the  other  two  as  from  a  polished 
stone. 

Veryjyreat  is  the^dependence  _  of  retention  and-jffimvlnciion 
upon  the  inten^iyoijhe_attention  and  interest  which  were 
attached  to  the  mental  states  the  first  time  they  were  present. 
The  burnt  child  shuns  the  fire,  and  the  dog  which  has 
been  beaten  runs  from  the  whip,y  after  a  single  vivid  experi- 
ence. People  in  whom  we  are"  interested  we  may  see  daily 


4  Memory 

and  yet  not  be  able  to  recall  the  color  of  their  hair  or  of  their 
eyes. 

Under  ordinary  circumstances,  indeed,  frequent  repetitions  are 
indispensable  in  order  to  make  possible  the  reproduction  of  a 
given  content.  Vocabularies,  discourses,  and  poems  of  any  length 
cannot  be  learned  by  a  single  repetition  even  with  the  greatest 
concentration  of  attention  on  the  part  of  an  individual  of  very 
great  ability.  By  a  sufficient  number  of  repetitions  their  final 
mastery  is  ensured,  and  by  additional  later  reproductions  gain 
in  assurance  and  ease  is  secured. 

")  /     Left  to  itself  every  mental  content  gradually  loses  its  capacity 

/   for  being  revived,  or  at  least  suffers^  loss_in  this  regard  under 

\  the  influence  of  time.    Facts  crammed  at  examination  time  soon 

vanish,  if  they  were  not  sufficiently  grounded  by  other  study 

and  later  subjected  to  a  sufficient  review.    But  even  a  thing  so 

early  and  deeply  founded  as  one's  mother  tongue  is  noticeably 

impaired  if  not  used  for  several  years. 

Section  3.    Deficiencies  in  our  Knowledge  concerning  Memory 

The  foregoing  sketch  of  our  knowledge  concerning  memory 
makes  no  claim  to  completeness.  To  it  might  be  added  such  a 
series  of  propositions  known  to  psychology  as  the  following: 
''  He  who  learns  quickly  also  forgets  quickly,"  "  Relatively  long 
series  of  ideas  are  retained  better  than  relatively  short  ones," 
Old  people  forget  most  quickly  the  things  they  learned  last," 
and  the  like.  Psychology  is  wont  to  make  the  pictu-re  rich  with 
anecdote  and  illustration.  But — and  this  is  the  main  point — 
even  if  we  particularise  our  knowledge  by  a  most  extended  use 

(.of  illustrative  material,  everything  that  we  can  say  retains  the 
indefinite,  general,  and  comparative  character  of  the  propositions 
quoted  above.  Our  information  comes  almost  exclusively  from 
the  observation  of  extreme  and  especially  striking  cases.  We 
are  able  to  describe  these  quite  correctly  in  a  general  way  and 
in  vague  expressions  of  more  or  less.  We  suppose,  again  quite 
correctly,  that  the  same  influences  exert  themselves,  although 
in  a  less  degree,  in  the  case  of  the  inconspicuous,  but  a  thousand- 
fold more  frequent,  daily  activities  of  memory.  But  if  our 

i .' curiosjty__ carries  us  further  and  we  crave  more  specific  and 
detailed  information  concerning  these  dependencies  and  inter- 


Our  Knowledge  Concerning  Memory  5 

dependencies,  both  those  already  mentioned  and  others, — if  we 
put  questions,  so  to  speak,  concerning  their  inner  structure — our 
answer  is  silence.  HQW  does  the  disappearance  of  the  ability 
to  reproduce,  forgetfulness,  depend  upon  the  length  of  , 
time  ^during  which  ^a_mp_e±kiQps  have  taken  place?  What, 
proportion  does  the  increase  in  the  certainty  of  reproduction! 
bear  to  the  number  ojj^petitions  ?  How  do  these  relations  vary 
with  the  greater  or  less  intensity  of  the  interest  in  the  thing  to' 
be  reproduced  ?  These  and  similar  questions  no  one  can  answer. 

This  inability  does  not  arise  from  a  chance  neglect  of  investi- 
gation of  these  relations.  We  cannot  say  that  tomorrow,  or 
whenever  we  wish  to  take  time,  we  can  investigate  these  prob- 
lems. On  the  contrary  this  inability  is  inherent  in  the  nature 
of  the  questions  themselves.  Although  the  conceptions  in  ques- 
tion— namely,  degrees  of  forgetfulness,  of  certainty  and  interest 
— are  quite  correct,  we  have  no  means  for  establishing  such 
degrees  in  our  experience  except  at  the  extremes,  and  even  then 
we  cannot  accurately  limit  those  extremes.  We  feel  therefore 
that  we  are  not  at  all  in  a  condition  to  undertake  the  investiga- 
tion. We  form  certain  conceptions  during  striking  experiences, 
but  we  cannot  find  any  realisation  of  them  in  the  similar  but  less 
striking  experiences  of  everyday  life.  Vice  versa  there  are  prob-~ 
ably  many  conceptions  which  we  have  not  as  yet  formed  which 
would  be  serviceable  and  indispensable  for  a  clear  understanding 
of  the  facts,  and  their  theoretical  mastery. 

The  amount  of  detailed  information  which  an  individual  has 
at  his  command  and  his  theoretical  elaborations  of  the  same 
are  rnutually_ ,dep_endent ;  they  grow  in  and  through  each  other. 
It  is  because  of  the  indefinite  and  little  specialised  character 
of  our  knowledge  that  the  theories  concerning  the  processes  of 
memory,  reproduction,  and  association  have  been  up  to  the 
present  time  of  so  little  value  for  a  proper  comprehension  of 
those  processes.  For  example,  to  express  our  ideas  concerning 
their  physical  basis  we  use  different  metaphors — stored  up  ideas, 
engraved  images,  well-beaten  paths. There  is  only  one  thing 
certain  about  these  figures  of  speech  and  that  is  that  they  are 
not  suitable. 

Of  course  the  existence  of  all  these  deficiencies  has  its  per- 
fectly sufficient  basis  in  the  extraordinary  difficulty  and  com- 
plexity of  the  matter.  It  remains  to  be  proved  whether,  in  spite 


6  Memory 

of  the  clearest  insight  into  the  inadequacy  of  our  knowledge, 
we  shall  ever  make  any  actual  progress.  Perhaps  we  shall 
always  have  to  be  resigned  to  this.  But  a  somewhat  greater 
accessibility  than  has  so  far  been  realised  in  this  field  cannot  be 
denied  to  it,  as  I  hope  to  prove  presently.  If  by  any  chance  a 
way  to  a  deeper  penetration  into  this  matter  should  present  itself, 
surely,  considering  the  significance  of  memory  for  all  mental 
phenomena,  it  should  be  our  wish  to  enter  that  path  at  once. 
For  at  the  very  worst  we  should  prefer  to  see  resignation  arise 
from  the  failure  of  earnest  investigations  rather  than  from 
persistent,  helpless  astonishment  in  the  face  of  their  difficulties. 


CHAPTER  II 

THE  POSSIBILITY  OF  ENLARGING  OUR  KNOWL- 
EDGE OF  MEMORY 

Section  4.     The  Method  of  Natural  Science 

ywA^ftC*  ***•* 

The  ^method  of  obtaining  exact  measurements  —  i.e.,  numer- 
ically exact  ones  —  of  the  inner  structure  of  causal  relations  -is, 
by  virtue  of  its  nature,  of  general  validity.  This^R€thod,(  indeed) 
has  been  so  exclusively  used  and  so  fully  worked  out  by 
the  natural  sciences  that,  as  a  rule,  it  is  defined  as  something 
peculiar  to  them,  as  the  method  of  natural  science.  To  repeat, 
however,  its  logical  nature  makes  it  generally  applicable  to  all 
spheres  of  existence  and  phenomena.  Moreover,  the  possibility 
of  defining  accurately  and  exactly  the  actual  behavior  of  any 
process  whatever,  and  thereby  of  giving  a  reliable  basis  for  the 
direct  comprehension  of  its  connections  depends  above  all  upon 
the  possibility  of  applying  this  method. 

We  all  know  of  what  this  method  consists:  an  attempt  is 

«f\  6/*\  'I 
J   / 


. 

of  these  conditions~IT  Isolated  from  the  rest  and  jrarted:  in  a  CJT*~ 
way  that  can  be  numerically  described;  then  the  accompanying 
change  on  the  side  of  the  effect  is  ascertained  by  measurement 
or  computation. 

•  Two  fundamental  and  insurmountable  difficulties,  seem,  how- 
ever, to  oppose  a  transfer  of  this  method  to  the  investigation  of 
the  causal  relations  of  mental  events  in  general  and  of  those  of 
memory  in  particular.  In  the  first  place,  how  are  we  to  keep 
even  approximately  constant  the  bewildering  mass  of  causal 
conditions  which,  in  so  far  as  they  are  of  mental  nature,  almost 
completely  elude  our  control,  and  which,  moreover,  are  subject 
to  endless  and  incessant  change?  In  the  second  place,  by  what 
possible  means  are  we  to  measure  numerically  the  mental  pro- 
cesses which  flit  by  so  quickly  and  which  on  introspection  are  so 

7 


'I 
J   / 

" 


8  Memory 

hard  to  analyse?     I  shall  first  discuss  the  second  difficulty  in 
connection,  of  course,  with  memory,  since  that  is  our  present 
oncern. 

Section  5.    Introduction  of  Numerical  Measurements  for  Memory 

Contents 

If  we  consider  once  more  the  conditions  of  retention  and 
reproduction  mentioned  above  (§2),  but  now  with  regard  to 
the  possibility  of  computation,  we  shall  see  that  with  two  of 
them,  at  least,  a  numerical  determination  and  a  numerical  varia- 
tion are  possible.  The  different  times  which  elapse  between 
[the  first  production  and  the  reproduction  of  a  series  of  ideas 
can  be  measured  and  the  repetitions  necessary  to  make  these 
series  reproducible  can  be  counted.  At  first  sight,  however,  there 
seems  to  be  nothing  similar  to  this  on  the  side  of  the  effects. 
Here  there  is  only  one  alternative,  a  reproduction  is  either  pos- 
sible or  it  is  not  possible.  It  takes  place  or  it  does  not  take 
place.  Of  course  we  take  for  granted  that  it  may  approach, 
under  different  conditions,  more  or  less  near  to  actual 
occurrence  so  that  in  its  subliminal  existence  the  series  possesses 
graded  differences.  But  as  long  as  we  limit  our  observations 
to  that  which,  either  by  chance  or  at  the  call  of  our  will,  comes 
out  from  this  inner  realm,  all  these  differences  are  for  us  equally 
non-existent. 

By  somewhat  less  dependence  upon  introspection  we  can,  how- 
ever, by  indirect*  means  force  these  differences  into  the  open. 
A  poem  is  learned  by  heart  and  then  not  again  repeated.  We 
will  suppose  that  after  a  half  year  it  has  been  forgotten:  no 
effort  of  recollection  is  able  to  call  it  back  again  into  conscious  • 
ness.  At  best  only  isolated  fragments  return.  Suppose  that 
the  poem  is  again  learned  by  heart.  It  then  becomes  evident 
that,  although  to  all  appearances  totally  forgotten,  it  still  in  a 
certain  sense  exists  and  in  a  way  to  be  effective.  The  second 
learning  requires  noticeably  less  time  or  a  noticeably  smaller 
umber  of  repetitions  than  the  first.  It  also  requires  less  time 
or  repetitions  than  would  now  be  necessary  to  learn  a  similar 
poem  of  the  same  length.  In  this  difference  in  time  and  number 
of  repetitions  we  have  evidently  obtained  a  certain  measure 
for  that  inner  energy  which  a  half  year  after  the  first  learning 
still  dwells  in  that  orderly  complex  of  ideas  which  make  up  the 


Possibility  of  Enlarging  Our  Knowledge  of  Memory  9 

poem.  After  a  shorter  time  we  should  expect  to  find  the  dif- 
ference greater;  after  a  longer  time  we  should  expect  to  find 
it  less.  If  'the  first  committing  to  memory  is  a  very  careful  and 
long  continued  one,  the  difference  will  be  greater  than  if  it 
is  desultory  and  soon  abandoned. 

In  short,  we  have  without  doubt  in  these  differences  numerical 
expressions  for  the  difference  between  these  subliminally  per- 
sistent series  of  ideas,  differences  which  otherwise  we  would 
have  to  take  for  granted  and  would  not  be  able  to  demonstrate 
by  direct  observation.  Therewith  we  have  gained  possession 
of  something  that  is  at  least  like  that  which  we  are  seeking 
in  our  attempt  to  get  a  foothold  for  the  application  of  the 
method  of  the  natural  sciences :  namely,  phenomena  on  the  side 
of  the  effects  which  are  clearly  ascertainable,  which  vary  in 
accordance  with  the  variation  of  conditions,  and  which  are 
capable  of  numerical  determination.  Whether  we  possess  in 
them  correct  measures  for  these  inner  differences,  and  whether  / 
we  can  achieve  through  them  correct  conceptions  as  to  the  causal 
relations  into  which  this  hidden  mental  life  enters — these  ques-' 
tions  cannot  be  answered  a  priori.  Chemistry  is  just  as  little 
able  to  determine  a  priori  whether  it  is  the  electrical  phenomena, 
or  the  thermal,  or  some  other  accompaniment  of  the  process  of 
chemical  union,  which  gives  it  its  correct  measure  of  the  effective 
forces  of  chemical  affinity.  There  is  only  one  way  to  do  this, 
and  that  is  to  see  whether  it  is  possible  to  obtain,  on  the  pre- 
supposition of  the  correctness  of  such  an  hypothesis^  well  classi- 
fied, uncontradictory  results,  and  correct  anticipations  of  the 
future. 

Instead  of  the  simple  phenomenon — occurrence  or  non-occur- 
rence of  a  reproduction — which  admits  of  no  numerical  distinc-} 
tion,  I  intend  therefore  to  consider  from  the  experimental 
standpoint  a  more  complicated, process  as  the  effect,  and  I  shall 
observe  and  measure  its  changes  as  the  conditions  are  variedU 
By  this  I  mean  the  artificial  bringing  about  by  an  appropriate 
number  of  repetitions  of  a  reproduction  which  would  not  occur 
of  its  own  accord. 

But  in  order  to  realise  this  experimentally,  two  conditions  at 
least  must  be  fulfilled. 

Tn  the  first  place,  it  must  be  possible  to  define  with  .  some 
certainty  the  moment  when  the  goal  is  reached — i.e.,  when  the 


r 


Memory 


process  of  learning  by  heart  is  completed.  For  if  the  process 
of  learning  by  heart  is  sometimes  carried  past  that  moment  and 
sometimes  broken  off  before  it,  then  part  of  the  differences  found 
under  the  varying  circumstances  would  be  due  to  this  in- 
equality, and  it  would  be  incorrect  to  attribute  it  solely  to  inner 
differences  in  the  series  of  ideas.  Consequently  among  the 
different  reproductions  of,  say,  a  poem,  occurring  during  the 
process  of  its  memorisation,  the  experimenter  must  single  out 
one'  asi  especially  characteristic,  and  be  able  to  find  it  again  with 
practical  accuracy. 

__In  the  second  place  the  presupposition  must  be  allowed  that 
the  number  of  repetitions  by  means  of  which,  the  other  condi- 
tions being  unchanged,  this  characteristic  reproduction  is  brought 
about  would  be  every  time  the  same.  For  if  this  number, 
under  conditions  otherwise  equivalent,  is  now  this  and  now  that, 
the  differences  arising  from  varied  conditions  lose,  of  course, 
all  significance  for  the  critical  evaluation  of  those  varying 
conditions. 

Now,  as  far  as  the  first  condition  is  concerned,  it  is  easily 
fulfilled  wherever  you  have  what  may  properly  be  called  learn- 
ing by  heart,  as  in  the  case  of  poems,  series  of  words,  tone- 
sequences,  and  the  like.  Here,  in  general,  as  the  number  of 
repetitions  increases,  reproduction  is  at  first  fragmentary  and 
halting;  then  it  gains  in  certainty;  and  finally  takes  place 
smoothly  and  without  error.  The  first  reproduction  in  which 
this  last  result  appears  can  not  only  be  singled  out  as  especially 
characteristic,  but  can  also  be  practically  recognised.  For  con- 
venience I  will  designate  this  briefly  as  the  first  possible  repro- 
duction. 

The  question  now  is: — Does  this  fulfill  the  second  condition 
mentioned  above?  Is  the  number  of  repetitions  necessary  to 
bring  about  this  reproduction  always  the  same,  the  other  con- 
ditions being  equivalent? 

However,  in  this  form,  the  question  will  be  justly  rejected 
because  it  forces  upon  us,  as  if  it  were  an  evident  supposition, 
the  real  point  in  question,  the  very  heart  of  the  matter,  and 
admits  of  none  but  a  misleading  answer.  Anyone  will  be  ready 
to  admit  without  hesitation  that  this  relation  of  dependence 
will  be  the  same  if  perfect  equality  of  experimental  conditions 
is  maintained.  The  much  invoked  freedom  of  the  will,  at  least. 


Possibility  of  Enlarging  Our  Knowledge  of  Memory         1 1 

has  hardly  ever  been  misunderstood  by  anybody  so  far  as  to 
come  in  here.  But  this  theoretical  constancy  is  of  little  value: 
How  shall  I  find  it  when  the  circumstances  under  which  I  am 
actually  forced  to  make  my  observations  are  never  the  same? 
So  I  must  rather  ask: — Can  I  bring  under  my  control  the  in- 
evitably and  ever  fluctuating  circumstances  and  equalise  them 
to  such  an  extent  that  the  constancy  presumably  existent  in  the 
causal  relations  in  question  becomes  visible  and  palpable  to  me? 
Thus  the  discussion  of  the  one  difficulty  which  opposes  an 
exact  examination  of  the  causal  relations  in  the  mental  sphere 
has  led  us  of  itself  to  the  other  (§4).  A  numerical  determinsT") 
tion  of  the  interdependent  changes  of  cause  and  effect  appears 
indeed  possibl/ if)only  we  can  realise  the  necessary  uniformity 
of  the  significant  conditions  in  the  repetition  of  our  experiments. 

Section  6.     The  Possibility  of  Maintaining  the  Constancy  of 
Conditions  Requisite  for  Research 

He  who  considers  the  complicated  processes  of  the  higher 
mental  life  or  who  is  occupied  with  the  still  more  complicated 
phenomena  of  the  state  and  of  society  will  in  general  be  inclined 
to  deny  the  possibility  of  keeping  constant  the  conditions  for 
psychological  experimentation.  Nothing  is  more  familiar  to 
us  than  the  capriciousness  of  mental  life  which  brings  to  nought 
all  foresight  and  calculation.  Factors  which  are  to  the  highest 
degree  determinative  and  to  the  same  extent  changeable,  such 
as  mental  vigor,  interest  in  the  subject,  concentration  of  atten-"p> 
tion,  changes  in  the  course  of  thought  which  have  been  brought 
about  by  sudden  fancies  and  resolves — all  these  are  either  not  at 
all  under  our  control  or  are  so  only  to  an  unsatisfactory  extent.  V 

However,  care  must  be  taken  not  to  ascribe  too  much,  weight 
to  these  views,  correct  in  themselves,  when  dealing  with  fields 
other  than  those  of  the  processes  by  the  observation  of  which 
these  views  were  obtained.  All  such  unruly  factors  are  of  the 
greatest  importance  for  higher  mental  processes  which  occur 
only  by  an  especially  favorable  concurrence  of  circumstances. 
The  more  lowly,  commonplace,  and  constantly  occurring  pro- 
cesses are  not  in  the  least  withdrawn  from  their  influence,  but 
we  have  it  for  the  most  part  in  our  power,  when  it  is  a  matter 
of  consequence,  to  make  this  influence  only  slightly  disturbing. 
Sensorial  perception,  for  example,  certainly  occurs  with  greater 


Memory 


or  less  accuracy  according  to  the  degree  of  interest;  it  is  con- 
•  stantly  given  other  directions  by  the  change  of  external  stimuli 
and  by  ideas.  But,  in  spite  of  that,  we  are  on  the  whole 
sufficiently  able  to  see  a  house  just  when  we  want  to  see  it  and 
to  receive  practically  the  same  picture  of  it  ten  times  in  suc- 
cession in  case  no  objective  change  has  occurred. 

There  is  nothing  a  priori  absurd  in  the  assumption  that  ordin- 
l  ary  retention  and  reproduction,  which,  according  to  general 
agreement,  is  ranked  next  to  sensorial  perception,  should  also 
behave  like  it  in  this  respect.  Whether  this  is  actually  the 
case  or  not,  however,  I  say  now  as  I  said  before,  cannot  be 
decided  in  advance.  Our  present  knowledge  is  much  too  frag- 
mentary, too  general,  too  largely  obtained  from  the  extraordin- 
ary to  enable  us  to  reach  a  decision  on  this  point  by  its  aid ; 
at  must  be  reserved  for  experiments  especially  adapted  to  that 
urpose.  We  must  try  in  experimental  fashion  to  keep  as 
constant  as  possible  those  circumstances  whose  influence  on 
retention  and  reproduction  is  known  or  suspected,  and  then 
ascertain  whether  that  is  sufficient.  The  material  must  be  so 
hosen  that  decided  differences  of  interest  are,  at  least  to  all 
ppearances,  excluded;  equality  of  attention  may  be  promoted 
iy  preventing  external  disturbances;  sudden  fancies  are  not 
Subject  to  control,  but,  on  the  whole,  their  disturbing  effect  is 
limited  to  the  moment,  and  will  be  of  comparatively  little  account 
[f  the  time  of  the  experiment  is  extended,  etc. 

When,  however,  we  have  actually  obtained  in  such  manner 
/  the  greatest  possible  constancy  of  conditions  attainable  by  us, 
(^ jfnow  are  we  to  know  whether  this  is  sufficient  for  our  purpose  ? 
When  are  the  circumstances,  which  will  certainly  offer  differ- 
ences enough  to  keen  observation,  sufficiently  constant?     The 
answer  may  be  made : — When  upon  repetition  of  the  experiment 
the  results  remain  constant.     The  latter  statement  seems  simple 
enough  to  be  self-evident,  but  on  closer  approach  to  the  matter 
still  another  difficulty  is  encountered. 

Section  7.     Constant  Averages 

When  shall  the  results  obtained  from  repeated  experiments 
under  circumstances  as  much  alike  as  possible  pass  for  constant 
or  sufficiently  constant?  Is  it  wheji  one  result  has  the  same 


Possibility  of  Enlarging  Our  Knowledge  of  Memory          1 3 

value  as  the  other  or  at  Isast  deviates  so  little' from  it  that  the 
difference  in  proportion  to  its  own  quantity  and  for  our  pur- 
poses is  of  no  account  ? 

Evidently  not.  That  would  be  asking  too  much,  and  is  not 
necessarily  obtained  even  by  the  natural  sciences.  Then,  perhaps 
it  is  when  the  avejrages  from  larger  groups  of  experiments 
exhibit  the  characteristics  mentioned  above? 

Again  evidently  not.  That  would  be  asking  too  little.  For, 
if  observation  of  processes  that  resemble  each  other  from  any 
point  of  view  are  thrown  together  in  sufficiently  large  numbers,  1 
fairly  constant  mean  values  are  almost  everywhere  obtained 
which,  nevertheless,  possess  little  or  no  importance  for  the  pur- 
poses which  we  have  here.  The  exact  distance  of  two  signal 
poles,  the  position  of  a  star  at  a  certain  hour,  the  expansion 
of  a  metal  for  a  certain  increase  of  temperature,  all  the  numer- 
ous coefficients  and  other  constants  of  physics  and  chemistry  are 
given  us  as  average  values  which  only  approximate  to  a  high 
degree  of  constancy.  On  the  other  hand  the  number  of  suicides 
in  a  certain  month,  the  average  length  of  life  in  a  given  place, 
the  number  of  teams  and  pedestrians  per  day  at  a  certain  street 
corner,  and  the  like,  are  also  noticeably  constant,  each  being  an 
average  from  large  groups  of  observations.  But  both  kinds  of 
numbers,  which  I  shall  temporarily  denote  as  constants  of  natural 
science  and  statistical  constants,  are,  as  everybody  knows,  con- 
stant from  different  causes  and  with  entirely  different  significance 
for  the  knowledge  of  causal  relations. 

These  differences  can  be  formulated  as  follows: — 

In  the  case  of  the  constants  of  the  natural  sciences  each  indi-^> 
vidual  effect  is  produced  by  a  combination  of  causes  exactly  x> 
"~afike.j  The  individual  values  come  out  somewhat  differently 
because  a  certain  number  or"  those  causes  do  not  always  join 
the  combination  with  exactly  the  same  values  (e.  g.,  there  are 
little  errors  in  the  adjustment  and  reading  of  the  instruments, 
irregularities  in  the  texture  or  composition  of  the  material  ex- 
amined or  employed,  etc.).  However,  experience  teaches  us  that 
this  fluctuation  of  separate  causes  does  not  occur  absolutely 
irregularly  but  that  as  a  rule  it  runs  through  or,  rather,  tries 
out  limited  and  comparatively  small  circles  of  values  symmet- 
rically distributed  around  a  central  value.  If  several  cases  are 
brought  together  the  effects  of  the  separate  deviations  must  more 


1 4  Memory 

and  more  compensate  each  other  and  thereby  be  swallowed  up 
in  the  central  value  around  which  they  occur.  And  the  final 
result  of  combining  the  values  will  be  approximately  the  same 
as  if  the  actually  changeable  causes  had  remained  the  same 
not  only  conceptually  but  also  numerically.  Thus,  the  average 
value  is  in  these  cases  the  adequate  numerical  representative  of 
a  conceptually  definite  and  well  limited  system  of  causal  con- 
nections; if  one  part  of  the  system  is  varied,  the  accompanying 
changes  of  the  average  value  again  give  the  correct  measure 
for  the  effect  of  those  deviations  on  the  total  complex. 

On  the  other  hand,  no  matter  from  what  point  of  view  sta- 
tistical constants  may  be  considered  it  cannot  be  said  of  them 
that  each  separate  value  has  resulted  from  the  combination  of 
causes  which  by  themselves  had  fluctuated  within  tolerably 
narrow  limits  and  in  symmetrical  fashion.  The  separate  effects 
arise,  rather,  from  an  oftimes  inextricable  multiplicity  of  causal 
combinations  of  very  different  sorts,  which,  to  be  sure,  may 
share  numerous  factors  with  each  other,  but  which,  taken  ag  a 
whole,  have  no  conceivable  community  and  actually  correspond 
only  in  some  one  characteristic  of  the  effects.  That  the  value 
of  the  separate  factors  must  be  very  different  is,  so  to  say,  self 
evident.  That,  nevertheless,  approximately  constant  values  ap- 
pear even  here  by  the  combining  of  large  groups — this  fact  we 
may  make  intelligible  by  saying  that  in  equal  and  tolerably  large 
intervals  of  time  or  extents  of  space  the  separate  causal  com- 
binations will  be  realised  with  approximately  equal  frequency; 
we  do  this  without  doing  more  than  to  acknowledge  as  extant  a 
peculiar  and  marvellous  arrangement  of  nature.  Accordingly 
these  constant  mean  values  represent  no  definite  and  separate 
causal  systems  but  combinations  of  such  which  are  by  no  means 
of  themselves  transparent.  Therefore  their  changes  upon  varia- 
tion of  conditions  afford  no  genuine  measure  of  the  effects  of 
these  variations  but  only  indications  of  them.  They  are  of  no 
direct  value  for  the  setting  up  of  numerically  exact  relations 
of  dependence  but  they  are  preparatory  to  this. 

Let  us  now  turn  back  to  the  question  raised  at  the  beginning 
of  this  section.  When  may  we  consider  that  this  equality  of 
conditions  which  we  have  striven  to  realise  experimentally  has 
been  attained  ?  The  answer  runs  as  follows :  When  the  average 
values  of  several  observations  are  approximately  constant  and 


Possibility  of  Enlarging  Our  Knowledge  of  Memory         1 5 

when  at  the  same  time  we  may  assume  that  the  separate  cases  V 
belong  to  the  same  causal  system,  whose  elements,  however,  are 
not  limited  to  exclusively  constant  values,  but  may  run  through 
small  circles  of  numerical  values  symmetrical  around  a  middle  \ 
value. 

Section  8.    The  Law  of  Errors 

Our  question,  however,  is  not  answered  conclusively  by  the 
statement  just  made.  Suppose  we  had  in  some  way  found  satis- 
factorily constant  mean  values  for  some  psychical  process,  how 
would  we  go  about  it  to  learn  whether  we  might  or  might  not 
assume  a  homogeneous  causal  condition,  necessary  for  their 
further  utilisation  ?  4  The  physical  scientist  generally  knows 
beforehand  that  he  will  have  to  deal  with  a  single  causal  com- 
bination, the  statistician  knows  that  he  has  to  deal  with  a  mask 
of  them,  ever  inextricable  despite  all  analysis.  Both  know  this 
from  the  elementary  knowledge  they  already  possess  of  the  . 
nature  of  the  processes  before  they  proceed  with  the  more  \ 
detailed  investigations.  Just  as,  a  moment  ago,  the  present 
knowledge  of  psychology  appeared  to  us  too  vague  and  unreli-  I 
able  to  be  depended  upon  for  decision  about  the  possibility  of 
constant  experimental  conditions ;  so  now  it  may  prove  insufficient 
to  determine  satisfactorily  whether  in  a  given  case  we  have  to  > 
deal  with  a  homogeneous  causal  combination  or  a  manifold  of 
them  which  chance  to  operate  together.  The  question  is,  there- 
fore, whether  we  may  throw  light  on  the  nature  of  the  causation 
of  the  results  we  obtain  under  conditions  as  uniform  as  possible 
by  the  help  of  some  other  criterion. 

The  answer  must  be:  This  cannot  be  done  with  absolute  cer- 
tainty, but  can,  nevertheless,  be  done  with  great  probability. 
Thus,  a  start  has  been  made  from  presuppositions  as  similar  as 
possible  to  those  by  which  physical  constants  have  been  obtained 
and  the  consequences  which  flow  from  them  have  been  investi- 
gated. This  has  been  done  for  the  distribution  of  the  single 
values  about  the  resulting  central  value  and  quite  independently 
of  the  actual  concrete  characteristics  of  the  causes.  Repeated 
comparisons  of  these  calculated  values  with  actual  observations 
have  shown  that  the  similarity  of  the  suppositions  is  indeed  great 
enough  to  lead  to  an  agreement  of  the  results.  The  outcome 
of  these  speculations  closely  approximates  to  reality.  It  consists 


1 6  Memory 

in  this, — that  the  grouping  of  a  large  number  of  separate  values 
that  have  arisen  from  causes  of  the  same  kind  and  with  the 
modifications  repeatedly  mentioned,  may  be  correctly  represented 
by  a  mathematical  formula,  the  so-called  Law  of  Errors.  This 
is  especially  characterised  by  the  fact  that  it  contains  but  one 
unknown  quantity.  This  unknown  quantity  measures  the  relative 
compactness  of  the  distribution  of  the  separate  values  around 
their  central  tendency.  It  therefore  changes  according  to  the 
kind  of  observation  and  is  determined  by  calculation  from  the 
separate  values. 

NOTE.  For  further  information  concerning  this  formula,  which 
is  not  here  our  concern,  I  must  refer  to  the  text-books  on  the 
calculation  of  probabilities  and  on  the  theory  of  errors.  For 
readers  unfamiliar  with  the  latter  a  graphic  explanation  will 
be  more  comprehensible  than  a  statement  and  discussion  of  the 
formula.  Imagine  a  certain  observation  to  be  repeated  1,000 
times.  Each  observation  as  such  is  represented  by  a  space  of 
one  square  millimeter,  and  its  numerical  value,  or  rather  its 
deviation  from  the  central  value  of  the  whole  1,000  observations, 
by  its  position  on  the  horizontal  line  p  q  of  the  adjoining 
Figure  I. 

For  every  observation  which  exactly  corresponds  with  the 
central  value  one  square  millimeter  is  laid  off  on  the  vertical 
line  m  n.  For  each  observed  value  which  deviates  by  one 
unit  from  the  central  value  upward  one  square  millimeter  is 
laid  off  on  a  vertical  line  to  right  of  m  n  and  distant  one 
millimeter  from  it,  etc.  For  every  observed  value  which  devi- 
ates by  x  units  above  (or  below)  the  central  value,  one  sq. 
mm.  is  placed  on  a  vertical  line  distant  from  m  n  by  x 
mms.,  to  the  right  (or  left,  for  values  below  the  central  value). 
When  all  the  observations  are  arranged  in  this  way  the  outer 
contour  of  the  figure  may  be  so  compacted  that  the  projecting 
corners  of  the  separate  squares  are  transformed  into  a  sym- 
metrical curve.  If  now  the  separate  measures  are  of  such  a 
sort  that  their  central  value  may  be  considered  as  a  constant  as 
conceived  by  physical  science,  the  form  of  the  resulting  curve  is 
of  the  kind  marked  a  and  b  in  Fig.  I.  If  the  middle 
value  is  a  statistical  constant,  the  curve  may  have  any  sort  of 
a  form.  (The  curves  a  and  b  with  the  lines  p  q  in- 
clude in  each  case  an  area  of  1,000  sq.  mms.  This  is  strictly  the 
case  only  with  indefinite  prolongation  of  the  curves  and  the  lines 
P  q,  but  these  lines  and  curves  finally  approach  each  other  so 
closely  that  where  the  drawing  breaks  off  only  two  or  three  sq. 
mms.  at  each  end  of  the  curve  are  missing  from  the  full  number.) 
Whether,  for  a  certain  group  of  observations,  the  curve  has  a 


Possibility  of  Enlarging  Our  Knowledge  of  Memory         1 7 

more  steep  or  more  flat  form  depends  on  the  nature  of  those 
observations.  The  more  exact  they  are,  the  more  will  they  pile 
up  around  the  central  value;  and  the  more  infrequent  the  large 
deviations,  the  steeper  will  the  curve  be  and  vice  versa.  For 
the  rest  the  law  of  formation  of  the  curve  is  always  the  same. 
Therefore,  if  a  person,  in  the  case  of  any  specific  combination 
of  observations,  obtains  any  measure  of  the  compactness  of 
distribution  of  the  observations,  he  can  survey  the  grouping  of 
the  whole  mass.  He  could  state,  for  instance,  how  often  a 


deviation  of  a  certain  value  occurs  and  how  many  deviations 
fall  between  certain  limits.  Or — as  I  shall  show  in  what  follows 
— he  may  state  what  amount  of  variation  includes  between  itself- 
and  the  central  value  a  certain  per  cent  of  all  the  observed  values. 
The  lines  -f-  w  and  —w  of  our  figure,  for  instance,  cut  out 
exactly  the  central  half  of  the  total  space  representing  the  obser- 
vations. But  in  the  case  of  the  more  exact  observations  of  I  b 
they  are  only  one  half  as  far  from  m  n  as  in  i  a.  So  the  state- 
ment of  their  relative  distances  gives  also  a  measure  of  the 
accuracy  of  the  observations. 


1 8  Memory 

Therefore,  it  may  be  said:  wherever  a  group  of  effects  may 
be  considered  as  having  originated  each  time  from  the  same_ 
causal  combination,  which  was  subject  each  time  only  to  so- 
called  accidental  disturbances,  then  these  values  arrange  them- 
selves in  accordance  with  the  —law  of  errors." 

However,  the  reverse  of  this  proposition  is  not  necessarily 
true,  namely,  that  wherever  a  distribution  of  values  occurs 
according  to  the  law  of  errors  the  inference  may  be  drawn 
that  this  kind  of  causation  has  been  at  work.  Why  should 
nature  not  occasionally  be  able  to  produce  an  analogous  group- 
ing in  a  more  complicated  way?  In  reality  this  seems  only  an 
extremely  rare  occurrence.  For  among  all  the  groups  of  num- 
bers which  in  statistics  are  usually  condensed  into  mean  values 
not  one  has  as  yet  been  found  which  originated  without  question 
\  from  a  number  of  causal  systems  and  also  exhibited  the  arrange- 
\  ment  summarised  by  the  "  law  of  errors."1 

Accordingly,  this  law  may  be  used  as  a  criterion,  not  an  abso- 
lutely safe  one  to  be  sure,  but  still  a  highly  probable  one,  by 
means  of  which  to  judge  whether  the  approximately  constant 
mean  values  that  may  be  obtained  by  any  proceeding  may  be 
employed  experimentally  as  genuine  constants  of  science.  The 
Law  of  Errors  does  not  furnish  sufficient  conditions  for  such 
a  use  but  it  does  furnish  one  of  the  necessary  ones.  The  final 
explanation  must  depend  upon  the  outcome  of  investigations  to 
the  very  foundations  of  which  it  furnishes  a  certain  security. 
That  is  why  I  applied  the  measure  offered  by  it  to  answer  our 
still  unanswered  question:  If  the  conditions  are  kept  as  much 
alike  as  is  possible,  is  the  average  number  of  repetitions,  which 
is  necessary  for  learning  similar  series  to  the  point  of  first 
possible  reproduction,  a  constant  mean  value  in  the  natural 
science  sense?  And  I  may  anticipate  by  saying  that  in  the  case 
investigated  the  answer  has  come  out  in  the  affirmative. 

xThe  numbers  representing  the  births  of  boys  and  girls  respectively,  as 
derived  from  the  total  number  of  births,  are  said  to  group  themselves  in 
very  close  correspondence  with  the  law  of  errors.  But  in  this  case  it  is 
for  this  very  reason  probable  that  they  arise  from  a  homogeneous  combi- 
nation of  physiological  causes  aiming  so  to  speak  at  the  creation  of  a  well 
determined  relation.  (See  Lexis,  Zur  Theorie  der  Massenerscheinungen 
in  der  menschlichen  Gesellschaft,  p.  64  and  elsewhere  ) 


Possibility  of  Enlarging  Our  Knowledge  of  Memory         19 

Section  p.    Resume 

Two  fundamental  difficulties  arise  in  the  way  of  the  applica- 
tion of  the  so-called  Natural  Science  Method  to  the  examination 
of  psychical  processes: 

(1)  The  constant  flux  and  caprice  of  mental  events  do  not 
admit  of  the  establishment  of  stable  experimental  conditions. 

(2)  Psychical  processes  offer  no  means  for  measurement  or    i 
enumeration. 

In  the  case  of  the  special  field  of  memory  (learning,  retention,  f 
reproduction)  the  second  difficulty  may  be  overcome  to  a  certain 
extent.    Among  the  external  conditions  of  these  processes  some" 7 
are  directly  accessible  to  measurement  (the  time,  the  number  of  • 
repetitions).    They  may  be  employed  in  getting  numerical  values 
indirectlywhere  that  would  not  have  been  possible  directly. 
We  must  not  wait  until  the  series  of  ideas  committed  to  memory  , 
return  to  consciousness  of  themselves,  but  we  must  meet  them 
halfway  and  renew  them  to  such  an  extent  that  they  may.jus^  \ 
be  reproduced  without  error.    The  work  requisite  for  this  uncTer  • 
certain  conditions  I  take  experimentally  as  a  measure  of  the/ 
influence  of  these  conditions ;  the  differences  in  the  work  which 
appear  with  a  change  of  conditions  I  interpret  as  a  measure  of 
the  influence  of  that  change. 

Whether  the  first  difficulty,  the  establishment  of  stable  experi- 
mental conditions,  may  also  be  overcome  satisfactorily  cannot 
be  decided  a  priori.  Experiments  must  be  made  under  conditions 
as  far  as  possible  the  same,  to  see  whether  the  results,  which 
will  probably  deviate  from  one  another  when  taken  separately, 
will  furnish  constant  mean  values  when  collected  to  form  larger 
groups.  However,  taken  by  itself,  this  is  not  sufficient  to  enable 
us  to  utilise  such  numerical  results  for  the  establishment  of 
numerical  relations  of  dependence  in  the  natural  science  sense. 
Statistics  is  concerned  with  a  great  mass  of  constant  mean 
values  that  do  not  at  all  arise  from  the  frequent  repetition  of 
an  ideally  frequent  occurrence  and  therefore  cannot  favor 
further  insight  into  it.  Such  is  the  great  complexity  of  our 
mental  life  that  it  is  not  possible  to  deny  that  constant  mean 
values,  when  obtained,  are  of  the  nature  of  such  statistical  con- 
stants. To  test  that,  I  examine  the  distribution  of  the  separate 
numbers  represented  in  an  average  value.  If  it  corresponds 


2O  .  Memory 

to  the  distribution  found  everywhere  in  natural  science,  where 
repeated  observation  of  the -same  occurrence  furnishes  different 
separate  values,  I  suppose — tentatively  again — that  the  repeatedly 
examined  psychical  process  in  question  occurred  each  time  under 
conditions  sufficiently  similar  for  our  purposes.  This  supposi- 
tion is  not  compulsory,  but  is  very  probable.  If  it  is  wrong,  * 
the  continuation  of  experimentation  will  presumably  teach  this 
by  itself:  the  questions  put  from  different  points  ofvview  will 
lead  to  contradictory  results. 

Section  10.     The  Probable  Error 

The  quantity  which  measures  the  compactness  of  the  observed 
values  obtained  in  any  given  case  and  which  makes  the  formula 
which  represents  their  distribution  a  definite  one  may,  as  has 
already  been  stated,  be  chosen  differently.  I  use  the  so-called 
"  probable  error  "  (P.E.) — i.e.,  that  deviation  above  and  below 
the  mean  value  which  is  just  as  often  exceeded  by- the  separate 
values  as  not  reached  by  them,  and  which,  therefore,  between 
its  positive  and  negative  limits,  includes  just  half  of  all  the 
observational  results  symmetrically  arranged  around  the  mean 
value.  As  is  evident  from  the  definition  these  values  can  be 
obtained  from  the  results  by  simple  enumeration;  it  is  done 
more  accurately  by  a  theoretically  based  calculation. 

If  now  this  calculation  is  tried  out  tentatively  for  any  group 
of  observations,  a  grouping  of  these  values  according  to  the 
"  law  of  errors  "  is  recognised  by  the  fact  that  between  the  sub- 
multiples  and  the  multiples  of  the  empirically  calculated  probable 
error  there  are  obtained  as  many  separate  measures  symmetrically 
arranged  about  a  central  value  as  the  theory  requires. 

According  to  this  out  of  1,000  observations  there  should  be: 

Number  of 
Within  the^  limits  separate  measured 

±  A  P-E.  54 

.  ±    *  P.E.  89.5 

±    i  P.E.  134 

±    iP.E.  264 

±       P.E.  500 

±  H  P.E.  688 

±  2    P.E.  823 

±  2$  P.E.  908 

±  3    P.E.  957 

±  4    P.E.  993 


Possibility  of  Enlarging  Our  Knowledge  of  Memory         2 1 

If.  this  conformity  exists  in  a  sufficient  degree,  then  the  mere 
statement  of  the  probable  error  suffices  to  characterise  the 
arrangement  of  all  the  observed  values,  and  at  the  same  time  its 
quantity  gives  a  serviceable  measure  for  the  compactness  of  the 
distribution  around  the  central  value — i.e.,  for  its  exactness  and 
trustworthiness. 

As  we  have  spoken  of  the  probable  error  of  the  separate .  , 
observations,  (P.E.0),  so  can  we  also  speak  of  the  probable  error 
of  the  measures  of  the  central  tendency,  or  mean  values,  (P.E.m  ). 
This   describes   in   similar   fashion   the  grouping  which   would 
arise  for  the  separate  mean  values  -if  the  observation  of  the 
same  phenomenon  were  repeated  very  many  times  and  each  time 
an  equally  great  number  of  observations  were  combined  into  a 
central  value.    It  furnishe's  a  brief  but  sufficient  characterisation  1 
of  the  fluctuations  of  the  mean  values  resulting  from  repeated  f 
observations,  and  along  with  it  a  measure  of  the  security  and  the""^ 
trustworthiness  of  the  results  already  found. 

The  P.E.m  is  accordingly  in  general  included  in  what  follows. 
How  it  is  found  by  calculation,  again,  cannot  be  explained  here; 
suffice  it  that  what  it  means  be  clear.  It  tells  us,  then,  that,  on  the 
basis  of  the  character  of  the  total  observations  from  which  a' 
mean  value  has  ju"st  been  obtained,  it  may  be  expected  with  a 
probability  of  i  tq_j^  that  the  latter  value  departs  from  the 
presumably  correct  average  by  not  more  at  the  most  than  the 
amount  of  its  probable  error.  By  the  presumably  correct  average 
we  mean  that  one  which  would  have  been  obtained  if  the 
observations  had  been  indefinitely  repeated.  A  Jarger  deviation 
than  this  becomes  improbable  in  the  mathematical  sense — i.e., 
there  is  a  greater  probability  against  it  than  for  it.  And,  as  a 
glance  at  the  accompanying  table  shows  us,  the  improbability  of 
larger  deviations  increases  with  extreme  rapidity  as  their  size 
increases.  The  probability  that  the  obtained  average  should 
deviate  from  the  true  one  by  more  than  2^2  times  the  probable 
error  is  only  92  to  908,  therefore  about  i/io;  the  probability 
for  its  exceeding  four  times  the  probable  error  is  \ery  slight, 
7  to  993  (i  to  142). 


CHAPTER  III 

THE  METHOD  OF  INVESTIGATION 

Section  n.    Series  of  Nonsense  Syllables 

In  order  to  test  practically,  although  only  for  a  limited  field, 
a  way  of  penetrating  more  deeply  into  memory  processes — and 
it  is  to  these  that  the  preceding  considerations  have  been  directed 
— I  have  hit  upon  the  following  method. 

Out  of  the  simple  consonants  of  the  alphabet  and  our  eleven 
vowels  and  diphthongs  all  possible  syllables  of  a  certain  sort  were 
constructed,  a  vowel  sound  being  placed  between  two  consonants.1 

These  syllables,  about  2,300  in  number,  were  mixed  together 
and  then  drawn  out  by  chance  and  used  to  construct  series  of 
different  lengths,  several  of  which  each  time  formed  the  material 
for  a  test.8 

At  the  beginning  a  few  rules  were  observed  to  prevent,  in 
the  construction  of  the  syllables,  too  immediate  repetition  of 
similar  sounds,  but  these  were  not  strictly  adhered  to.  Later 
they  were  abandoned  and  the  matter  left  to  chance.  The  syllables 
used  each  time  were  carefully  laid  aside  till  the  whole  number 
had  been  used,  then  they  were  mixed  together  and  used  again. 

The  aim  of  the  tests  carried  on  with  these  syllable  series  was, 
by  means  of  repeated  audible  perusal  of  the  separate  series,  to 
so  impress  them  that  immediately  afterwards  they  could  volun- 
tarily just  be  reproduced.  This  aim  was  considered  attained 

1  The  vowel  sounds  employed  were  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  a,  6,  ii,  au,  ei,  eu.  For 
the  beginning  of  the  syllables  the  following  consonants  were  employed : 
b,  d,  f,  g,  h,  j,  k,  1,  m,  n,  p,  r,  s,  (=  sz),  t,  w  and  in  addition  ch,  sch, 
soft  s,  and  the  French  j  (19  altogether)  ;  for  the  end  of  the  syllables  f,  k, 
1,  m,  n,  p,  r,  s,  (=  sz)  t,  ch,  sch  (n  altogether).  For  the  final  sound 
fewer  consonants  were  employed  than  for  the  initial  sound,  because  a  Ger- 
man tongue  even  after  several  years  practise  in  foreign  languages  does  not 
quite  accustom  itself  to  the  correct  pronunciation  of  the  mediae  at  the  end. 
For  the  same  reason  I  refrained  from  the  use  of  other  foreign  sounds 
although  I  tried  at  first  to  use  them  for  the  sake  of  enriching  the  material. 

2 1  shall  retain  in  what  follows  the  designations  employed  above  and 
call  a  group  of  several  syllable  series  or  a  single  series  a  "  test."    A  num- 
ber of  "  tests  "  I  shall  speak  of  as  a  "  test  series  "  or  a  "  group  of  tests." 
22 


Tlie  Meilwd  of  Investigation  23 

when,  the  initial  syllable  being  given,  a  series  could  be  recited 
at  the  first  attempt,  without  hesitation,  at  a  certain  rate,  and 
with  the  consciousness  of  being  correct. 

Section  12.    Advantages  of  the  Material 

The  nonsense  material,  just  described,  offers  many  advantages, 
in  part  because  of  this  very  lack  of  meaning.  First  of  all,  it 
is  .relatively  simple  and  relatively  homogeneous.  In  the  case  of 
the  material  nearest  at  hand,  tiamelypoetry  or  prose,  the  content 
is  now  narrative  in  style,  now  descriptive,  or  now  reflective;  it 
contains  now^  a  phrase  that  is  pathetic,  now  one  that  is  humorous ; 
its  metaphors  are  sometimes  beautiful,  sometimes  harsh;  its 
rhythm  is  sometimes  smooth  and  sometimes  rough.  There  is 
thus  brought  into  play  a  multiplicity  of  influences  which  change 
without  regularity  and  are  therefore  disturbing.  Such  are  asso- 
ciations which  dart  here  and  there,  different  degrees  of  interest, 
lines  of  verse  recalled  because  of  their  striking  quality  or  their 
beauty,  and  the  like.  ^All  this  is  avoided  with  our  syllables^  - 
Among  many  thousand  combinations  there  occur  scarcely  a  few 
TfozerTthat  have  a  meaning  and  among  these  there  are  again 
only  a  few  whose  meaning  was  realised  while  they  were  being 
memorised. 

However,  the  simplicity  and  homogeneity  of  the  material  must 
not  be  overestimated.  It  is  still  far  from  ideal.  The  learning 
of  the  syllables  calls  into  play  the  three  sensory  fields,  sight,  t 
hearing  and  the  muscle  sense  of  the  organs  of  speech.  And  ! 
although  the  part  that  each  of  these  senses  plays  is  well  limited 
and  always  similar  in  kind,  a  certain  complication  of  the  results 
must  still  be  anticipated  because  of  their  combined  action.  Again, 
to  particularise,  the  homogeneity  of  the  series  of  syllables  falls 
considerably  short  of  what  might  be  expected  of  it.  These  series,  \ 
exhibit  very  important  and  almost  incomprehensible  variations 
as  to  the  ease  or  difficulty  with  which  they  are  learned.  It  even 
appears  from  this  point  of  view  as  if  the  differences  between 
sense  and  nonsense  material  were  not  nearly  so  great  as  one 
would  be  inclined  a  priori  to  imagine.  At  least  I  found  in  the 
case  of  learning  by  heart  a  few  cantos  from  Byron's  "  Don 
Juan  "  no  greater  range  of  distribution  of  the  separate  numerfcal 
measures  than  in  the  case  of  a  series  of  nonsense  syllables  in  ] 


24  Memory 

the  learning  of  which  an  approximately  equal  time  had  been 
spent.  In  the  former  case  the  innumerable  disturbing  influences 
mentioned  above  seem  to  have  compensated  each  other  in  pro- 
ducing a  certain  intermediate  effect;  whereas  in  the  latter  case 
the  predisposition,  due  to  the  influence  of  the^  mother  tongue, 
for  certain  combinations  of  letters  and  syllables  must  be  a  very 
heterogeneous  one. 

More  indubitable  are  the  advantages  of  our  material  in  two 
other  respects.  In  the.  first  place  it  permits  an  inexhaustible 
amount  of  new  combinations  of  quite  homogeneous  character, 
while  different  poems,  different  prose  pieces  always  have  some- 
thing incomparable.  ,  It  also  makes  possible  a  quantitative 
variation  which  is  adequate  and  certain ;  whereas  to  break 
off  before  the  end  or  to  begin  in  the  middle  of  the  verse  or 
the  sentence  leads  to  new  complications  because  of  various  and 
unavoidable  disturbances  of  the  meaning. 

-.Series  of  numbers,  which  I  also  tried,  appeared  impracticable 
for  the  more  thorough  tests.  Their  fundamental  elements  were 
too  small  in  number  and  therefore  too  easily  exhausted. 

Section  15.     Establishment  of  the  Most  Constant  Experimental 
Conditions  Possible 

The  following  rules  were  made  for  the  process  of  memorising. 
/T)  i.  The  separate  series  were  always  read  through  completely 

L  from  beginning  to  end ;  they  were  not  learneBnrTseparate^arts 
which  were  then  joined  together;  neither  were  especially  diffi- 
cult parts  detached  and  repeated  more  frequently!  There  was 
a  perfectly  free  interchange  between  the  reading  and  the  occa- 
sionally necessary  tests  of  the  capacity  to  reproduce  by  heart. 
•  the  latter  there  was  an  important  rule  to  the  effect  that 
upon  hesitation  the  rest  of  the  series  was  to  be  read  through 
to  the  end  before  beginning  it  again. 

2.  The  rejidingjind  the  recitation  of  the  series  took  place_at^ 
a  ^onstanl_rate,  that  of  150  strokes  per  minute.  A  clockwork 
metronome  placed  at  some  distance  was  at  first  used  to  regulate 
the  rate;  but  very  soon  the  ticking  of  a  watch  was  substituted, 
that  being  much  simpler  and  less  disturbing  to  the  attention. 
The  mechanism  of  escapement  of  most  watches  swings  300  times 
per  minute. 


. 
The  Method  of  Investigation  25 

3.  Since  it  is  practically  impossible  to  speak  continuously  with- 
out variation  of  accent,  the  following  method  was  adopted  to 
avoid  irregular  variations:  either  three  or  four  syllables  were 
united  into  a  measure,  and  thus  either  the  ist,  4th,  7th,  or  the 
ist,  5th,  Qth     .      .      .     syllables  were  pronounced  with  a  slight 
accent.    Stressing  of  the  voice  was  otherwise,  as  far  as  possible, 
avoided. 

4.  After  the  learning  of  each  separate  series  a  pause  of  15 
seconds  was  made,  and  used  for  the  tabulation  of  results.    Then 
the  following  series  of  the  same  test  was  immediately  taken  up. 

5.  During  the  process  of  learning,  the  purpose  of  reaching  the 
desired  goal  as  soon  as  possible  was  kept  in  mind  as  much  as 
was  feasible.     Thus,  to  the  limited  degree  to  which  conscious 
resolve  is  of  influence  here,  the  attempt  was  made  to  keep  the 
attention  concentrated  on  the  tiresome  task  and  its  purpose.     It 
goes  without  saying  that  care  was  taken  to  keep  away  all  outer 
disturbances  in  order  to  make  possible  the  attainment  of  this 
aim.    The  smaller  distractions  caused  by  carrying  on  the  test  in 
various  surroundings  were  also  avoided  as  far  as  that  could 
be  done. 

6.  There  was  no  attempt  to  connect  the  nonsense  syllables  by 
the  invention  of  special  associations  of  the  mnemotechnik 


learning  was  carried  on  solely  by  the  influence  of  the  mere  repe- 
titions upon  the  natural  memory.  As  I  do  not  possess  the  least 
practical  knowledge  of  the  mnemotechnical  devices,  the  fulfill- 
ment of  this  condition  offered  no  difficulty  to  me. 

7.  Finally  and  chiefly,  care  was  taken  that  the  objective  condi- 
tions of  life  during  the  period  of  the  tests  were  so  controlled 
as  to  eliminate  too  great  changes  or  irregularities.  Of  course, 
since  the  tests  extended  over  many  months,  this  was  possible  | 
only  to  a  limited  extent.  But,  even  so,  the  attempt  was  made 
to  conduct,  under  as  similar  conditions  of  life  as  possible,  those 
tests  the  results  of  which  were  to  be  directly  compared.  In 
particular  the  activity  immediately  preceding  the  test  was  kept 
as  constant  in  character  as  was  possible.  Since  the  mental  as 
well  as  the  physical  condition  of  man  is  subject  to  an  evident 
periodicity  of  24  hours,  it  was  taken  for  granted  that  like  experi- 
mental  conditions  are  obtainable  only  at  like  times  of  day^. 
However,  in  order  to  carry  out  more  than  one  test  in  a  given 
day,  different  experiments  were  occasionally  carried  on  together 


z6  Memory 

at  different  times  of  day.  When  too  great  changes  in  the  outer 
and  inner  life  occurred,  the  tests  were  discontinued  for  a  length 
of  time.  Their  resumption  was  preceded  by  some  days  of  re- 
newed training  varying  according  to  the  length  of  the  inter- 
ruption. 

Section  14.     Sources  of  Error 

The  guiding,  point  of  view  in  the  selection  of  material  and 
in  determining  the  rules  for  its  employment  was,  as  is  evident, 
the  attempt  to  simplify  as  far  as  possible,  and  to  keep  as  constant 
as  possible,  the  conditions  under  which  the  activity  to  be 
observed,  that  of  memory,  came  into  play.  Naturally  the  better 
one  succeeds  in  this  attempt  the  more  does  he  withdraw  from 
the  complicated  and  changing  conditions  under  which  this  activity 
takes  place  in  ordinary  life  and  under  which  it  is  of  importance 
to  us.  But  that  is  no  objection  to  the  method.  The  freely 
falling  body  and  the  f rictionless  machine,  etc.,  with  which  physics 
deals,  are  also  only  abstractions  when  compared  with  the  actual 
happenings  in  nature  which  are  of  import  to  us.  We  can  almost 
nowhere  get  a  direct  knowledge  of  the  complicated  and  the  real, 
but  must  get  at  them  in  roundabout  ways  by  successive  com- 
binations of  experiences,  each  of  which  is  obtained  in  artificial, 
\Nl  experimental  cases,  rarely  or  never  furnished  in  this  form  by 
nature. 

Meanwhile  the  fact  that  the  connection  with  the  activity  of 

memory  in  ordinary  life  is  for  the  moment  lost  is  of  less  im- 

I    portance  than  the  reverse,  namely,  that  this  connection  with  the 

1    complications  and  fluctuations  of  life  is  necessarily  still  a  too 

Lclose.  one...   The  struggle  to  attain  the  most  simple  and  uniform 

conditions  possible    at    numerous    points    naturally    encounters 

obstacles  that  are  rooted  in  the  nature  of  the  case  and  which 

thwart    the    attempt.     The    unavoidable    dissimilarity    of    the 

material  and  the  equally  unavoidable  irregularity  of  the  external 

conditions  have  already  been  touched  upon.    I  pass  next  to  two 

other  unsurmountable  sources  of  difficulty. 

By  means  of  the  successive  repetitions  the  series  are,  so  to 
speak,  raised  to  ever  higher  levels.     The  natural  assumption- 
would  be  that  at  the  moment  when  they  could  for  the  first  time 
be  reproduced  by  heart  the  level  thus  attained  would  always  be 
the  same.     If  only  this  were  the  case,  i.e.,  if  this  characteristic 


The  Method  of  Investigation  2  7 

first  reproduction  were  everywhere  an  invariable  objective  sign  of 
an  equally  invariable  fixedness  of  the  series,  it  would  be  of  real 
value  to  us.  This,  however,  is  not  actually  the  case.  The  inner 
conditions  of  the  separate  series  at  the  moment  of  the  first 
possible  reproduction  are  not  always  the  same,  and  the  most  that  • 
can  be  assumed  is  that  in  the  case  of  these  different  series  these 
conditions  always  oscillate  about  the  same  degree  of  inner/ 
surety.  This  is  clearly  seen  if  the  learning  and  repeating  of 
the  series  is  continued  after  that  first  spontaneous  reproduction 
of  the  series  has  been  attained.  As  a  general  thing  the  capacity 
for^vohmtary  reproduction  persists  after  it  has  once  been 
reached.  In  numerous  cases,  however,  it  disappears  immediately 
after  its  first  appearance,  and  is  regained  only  after  several 
further  repetitions.  This  proves  that  the  predisposition  for 
memorising  the  series,  irrespective  of  their  differences  of  a 
larger  sort  according  to  the  time  of  day,  to  the  objective  and 
subjective  conditions,  etc.,  is  subject  to  small  variations  of  short 
duration,  whether  they  be  called  oscillations  of  attention  or  some- 
thing else.  If,  at  the  very  instant  when  the  material  to  be 
memorised  has  almost  reached  the  desired  degree  of  surety,  a 
chance  moment  of  especial  mental  clearness  occurs,  then  the  \ 
series  is  caught  on  the  wing  as  it  were,  often  to  the  learner's 
surprise;  but  the  series  cannot  long  be  retained.  By  the  occur- 
rence of  a  moment  of  special  dullness,  on  the  other  hand, 
first  errorless  reproduction  is  postponed  for  a  while,  although  the 
learner  feels  that  he  really  is  master  of  the  thing  and  wonders 
at  the  constantly  recurring  hesitations.  In  the  former  case,  in 
spite  of  the  homogeneity  of  the  external  conditions,  the  first 
errorless  reproduction  is  reached  at  a  point  a  little  below  the 
level  of  retention  normally  connected  with  it.  In  the  latter  case 
it  is  reached  at  a  point  a  little  above  that  level.  As  was  said 


before,  the  most  plausible  conjecture  to  make  in  this  connection 
is  that  these  deviations  will  compensate  each  other  in  the  case 
of  large  groups. 

Of  the  other  source  of  error,  I  can  only  say  that  it  may  occur 
and  that,  when  it  does,  it  is  a  source  of  great  danger.  I  mean 
the  secret  influence  of  theories  and  opinions  which  are  in  the 
process  of  formation.  An  investigation  usually  starts  out  with 
definite  presuppositions  as  to  what  the  results  will  be.  But  if 
this  is  not  the  case  at  the  start,  such  presuppositions  form  gradu- 


a8  Memory 

ally  in  case  the  experimenter  is  obliged  to  work  alone.  For  it 
/  js,  impossible  to  carry  on  the  investigations  for  any  length  of 
time  without  taking  notice  of  the  results.  The  experimenter 
must  know  whether  the  problem  has  been  properly  formulated 
or  whether  it  needs  completion  or  correction.  The  fluctuations 
of  the  results  must  be  controlled  in  order  that  the  separate 
observations  may  be  continued  long  enough  to  give  to  the  mean 
value  the  certainty  necessary  for  the  purpose  in  hand.  Conse- 
quently it  is  unavoidable  that,  after  the  observation  of  the 
numerical  results,  suppositions  should  arise  as  to  general  prin- 
ciples which  are  concealed  in  them  and  which  occasionally  give 
hints  as  to  their  presence.  As  the  investigations  are  carried 
further,  thesef  suppositions,  as'  well  as  those  present  at  the  begin- 
ning, constitute  a  complicating  factor  which  probably  has  a 
definite  influence  upon  the  subsequent  results.  It  goes  without 
saying  that  what  1  have  in  mind  is  not  any  consciously  recog- 
nised influence  but  something  similar  to  that  which  takes  place 
when  one  tries  to  be  very  unprejudiced  or  to  rid  one's  self  of 
a  thought  and  by  that  very  attempt  fosters  that  thought  or 
prejudice.  The  results  are  met  half  way  with  an  anticipatory 
knowledge,  with  a  kind  of  expectation.  Simply  for  the  experi- 
menter to  say  to  himself  that  such  anticipations  must  not  be 
allowed  to  alter  the  impartial  character  of  the  investigation  will 
not  by  itself  bring  about  that  result/  On  the  contrary,  they  do 
lain  and  play  a  role  in  determining  the  whole  inner  attitude. 
According  as  the  subject  notices  that  these  anticipations  are 
confirmed  or  not  confirmed  (and  in  general  he  notices  this  dur- 
ing the  learning),  he  will  feel,  if  only  in  a  slight  degree,  a  sort 
of  pleasure  or  surprise.  And  would  you  not  expect  that,  in 
spite  of  the  greatest  conscientiousness,  the  surprise  felt  by  the 
subject  over  especially  startling  deviations,  whether  positive  or 
negative,  would  result,  without  any  volition  on  his  part,  in  a 
slight  change  of  attitude?  Would  he  not  be  likely  to  exert 
himself  a  little  more  here  and  to  relax  a  little  more  there  than 
would  have  been  the  case  had  he  had  no  knowledge  or  presuppo- 
sition concerning  the  probable  numerical  value  of  the  results? 
I  cannot  assert  that  this  is  always  or  even  frequently  the  case, 
since  we  are  not  here  concerned  with  things  that  can  be  directly 
observed,  and  since  numerous  results  in  which  such  secret  warp- 
ing of  the  truth  might  be  expected  show  evident  independence 


The  Method  of  Investigation  29 

of  it.  All  I  can  say  is,  we  must  expect  something  of  the  sort 
from  our  general  knowledge  of  human  nature,  and  in  any  investi- 
gations in  which  the  inner  attitude  is  of  very  great  importance, 
as  for  example  in  experiments  on  sense  perception,  we  must 
give  special  heed  to  its  misleading  influence. 

It  is  evident  how  this  influence  in  general  makes  itself  felt. 
With  average  values  it  would  tend  to  level  the  extremes ;  where 
especially  large  or  small  numbers  are  expected  it  would  tend  to 
further  increase  or  decrease  the  values.  This  influence  can 
only  be  avoided  with  certainty  when  the  tests  are  made  by  two 
persons  working  together,  one  of  whom  acts  as  subject  for  a 
certain  time  without  raising  any  questions  concerning  the  pur- 
pose or  the  result  of  the  investigations.  Otherwise  help  can  be 
obtained  only  by  roundabout  methods,  and  then,  probably,  only 
to  a  limited  extent.  The  subject,  as  I  myself  always  did,  can 
conceal  from  himself  as  long  as  possible  the  exact  results.  The 
investigation  can  be  extended  in  such  a  way  that  the  upper  limits 
of  the  variables  in  question  are  attained.  In  this  way,  whatever 
warping  of  the  truth  takes  place  becomes  relatively  more  difficult 
and  unimportant.  Finally,  the  subject  can  propose  many  prob- 
lems which  will  appear  to  be  independent  of  each  other  in  the 
hope  that,  as  a  result,  the  true  relation  of  the  interconnected 
mental  processes  will  break  its  way  through. 

To  what  extent  the  sources  of  error  mentioned  have  affected 
the  results  given  below  naturally  cannot  be  exactly  determined. 
The  absolute  value  of  the  numbers  will  doubtless  be  frequently 
influenced  by  them,  but  as  the  purpose  of  the  tests  could  never 
have  been  the  precise  determination  of  absolute  values,  but 
rather  the  attainment  of  comparative  results  (especially  in  the 
numerical  sense)  and  relatively  still  more  general  results,  there 
is  no  reason  for  too  great  anxiety.  In  one  important  case 
(§  38)  I  could  directly  convince  myself  that  the  exclusion 
of  all  knowledge  concerning  the  character  of  the  results  brought 
about  no  change;  in  another  case  where  I  myself  could  not 
eliminate  a  doubt  I  called  especial  attention  to  it.  In  any  case 
he  who  is  inclined  a  priori  to  estimate  very  highly  the  uncon- 
scious influence  of  secret  wishes  on  the  total  mental  attitude 
will  also  have  to  take  into  consideration  that  the  secret  wish  to 
find  objective  truth  and  not  with  disproportionate  toil  to  place 
the  creation  of  his  own  fancy  upon  feet  of  clay — that  this  wish, 


30  Memory 

I  say,  may  also  claim  a  place  in  the  complicated  mechanism  of 
these  possible  influences. 

Section  15.    Measurement  of  Work  Required 

Ur*-** 

The  number  of  repetitions  which  were  necessary  for  memor- 
ising a  series  up  to  the  first  possible  reproduction  was  not 
originally  determined  by  counting,  but  indirectly  by  measuring 
in  seconds  the  time  that  was  required  to  memorise  it.  My  pur- 
pose was  in  this  way  to  avoid  the  distraction  necessarily  connected 
with  counting ;  and  I  could  assume  that  there  was  a  proportional 
relation  existing  between  the  times  and  the  number  of  repetitions 
occurring  at  any  time  in  a  definite  rhythm.  We  could  scarcely 
expect  this  proportionality  to  be  perfect,  since,  when  only  the 
time  is  measured,  the  moments  of  hesitation  and  reflection  are 
included,  which  is  not  true  when  the  repetitions  are  counted. 
!  Difficult  series  in  which  hesitation  will  occur  relatively  more 
frequently,  will,  by  the  method  of  time  measurement,  get  com- 
paratively greater  numbers,  the  easier  series  will  get  compara- 
tively smaller  numbers  than  when  the  repetitions  are  counted. 
But  with  larger  groups  of  series  a  tolerably  equal  distribution 
of  difficult  and  equal  series  may  be  taken  for  granted.  Conse- 
quently the  deviations  from  proportionality  will  compensate 
themselves  in  a  similar  manner  in  the  case  of  each  group. 

When,  for  certain  tests,  the  direct  counting  of  the  repetitions 
became  necessary,  I  proceeded  in  the  following  manner.  Little 
wooden  buttons  measuring  about  14  mms.  in  diameter  and  4 
mms.  at  their  greatest  thickness  were  strung  on  a  cord  which 
would  permit  of  easy  displacement  and  yet  heavy  enough  to 
prevent  accidental  slipping.  Each  tenth  piece  was  black;  the 
others  had  their  natural  color.  During  the  memorisation  the 
'cord  was  held  in  the  hand  and  at  each  new  repetition  a  piece 
was  displaced  some  centimeters  from  left  to  right.  When  the 
series  could  be  recited,  a  glance  at  the  cord,  since  it  was  divided 
into  tens,  was  enough  to  ascertain  the  number  of  repetitions  that 
had  been  necessary.  The  manipulation  required  so  little  atten- 
tion that  in  the  mean  values  of  the  time  used  (which  was  always 
tabulated  at  the  same  time)  no  lengthening  could  be  noted  as 
compared  with  earlier  tests. 

By  means  of  this  simultaneous  measurement  of  time  and  repe- 


The  Method  of  Investigation  3 1 

titions  incidental  opportunity  was  afforded  for  verifying  and 
more  accurately  defining  that  which  had  been  foreseen  and 
which  has  just  been  explained  with  regard  to  their  interrelation. 
When  the  prescribed  rhythm  of  150  strokes  per  minute  was  pre- 
cis«ly  maintained,  each  syllable  would  take  0.4  second ;  and  when 
the  simple  reading  of  the  series  was  interrupted  by  attempts 
to  recite  it  by  heart,  the  unavoidable  hesitations  would  lengthen 
the  time  by  small  but  fairly  uniform  amounts.  This,  however, 
did  not  hold  true  with  any  exactness;  on  the  contrary,  the  fol- 
lowing modifications  appeared. 

Wlien  the  direct  reading  of  the  series  predominated,  a  certain 
forcing,  an  acceleration  of  the  rhythm,  occurred  which,  without  |  . 
coming  to  consciousness,  on  the  whole  lowered  the  time  for  each 
syllable  below  the  standard  of  0.4  sec. 

When  there  was  interchange  between  reading  and  reciting, 
however,  the  lengthening  of  the  time  was  not  in  general  constant, 
but  was  greater  with  the  longer  series.  In  this  case,  since  the 
difficulty  increases  very  rapidly  with  increasing  length  of  the 
series,  there  occurs  a  slowing  of  the  tempo,  again  involuntary 
and  not  directly  noticeable.  Both  are  illustrated  by  the  follow- 
ing table.  , 


Series  of  16  syllables, 
for  the  most  part  read 

Each  syllable  required 
the  average  time  of 

Number  of 
series 

Number  of 
syllables 

8  times 
16      " 

0.398  sec. 
0.399    " 

60 
•      108 

960 
1728 

Series 

Were  in  part  read, 

Each  syllable  re- 

Number 

Number 

of  X 

in  part  recited  on 

quired  an  average 

of 

of 

syllables 

an  average  Y  times 

time  of  Z  sees. 

series 

syllables 

X= 

•y  

Z= 

12 

18 

0.416 

63 

756 

16 

31 

0.427 

252 

4032 

24 

45 

0.438 

21 

504 

36 

56 

0.459 

14 

504 

As  soon  as  this  direction  of  deviation  from  exact  propor- 
tionality was  noticed  there  appeared  in  the  learning  a  certain 

conscious  reaction  against  it.  i 

•  •-  •-       ~~  — — — .  | 


3  a  Memory 

Finally,  it  appeared  that  the  probable  error  of  the  time  meas- 
urements  was    somewhat   larger   than   that   of   the   repetitions. 
'  This  relation  is  quite  intelligible  in  the  light  of  the  explanations 
given  above.     In  the  case  of  the  time  measurements  the  larger 
values,  which  naturally  occurred  with  the  more  difficult  series, 

'  »  -r  •«*m~~-*m** 

were  relatively  somewhat  greater  than  in  the  case  of  the  number 

<    of  repetitions,  because  relatively  they  were  for  the  most  part 

lengthened  by  the  hesitations ;  conversely,  the  smaller  times  were 

necessarily   somewhat   smaller   relatively   than   the   number   of 

repetitions,  because  in  general  they  corresponded  to  the  easier 

\  series.    The  distribution  of  the  values  in  the  case  of  the  times 

is  therefore  greater  than  that  of  the  values  in  the  case  of  the 

repetitions. 

The  differences  between  the  two  methods  of  reckoning  are, 
as  is  readily  seen,  sufficiently  large  to  lead  to  different  results 
in  the  case  of  investigations  seeking  a  high  degree  of  exactness. 

rThat  is  not  the  case  with  the  results  as  yet  obtained ;  it  is  there- 
fore immaterial  whether  the  number  of  seconds  is  used  or  that 
of  the  repetitions. 

Decision  cannot  be  given  a  priori  as  to  which  method  of 
measurement  is  more  correct — i.e.,  is  the  more  adequate  measure 
of  the  mental  work  expended.  It  can  be  said  that  the  im-  \ 
pressions  are  due  entirely  to  the  repetitions,  they  are  the  thing  ] 
that  counts ;  it  can  be  said  that  a  hesitating  repetition  is  just  as 
good  as  a  simple  fluent  reproduction  of  the  line,  and  that  both-x 
are  to  be  counted  equally.  But  on  the  other  hand  it  may  be 
doubted  that  the  moments  of  recollection  are  merely  a  loss. 
In  any  case  a  certain  display  of  energy  takes  place  in  them: 
on  the  one  hand,  a  very  rapid  additional  recollection  of  the  imme- 
diately preceding  words  occurs,  a  new  start,  so  to  speak,  to  get 
over  the  period  of  hesitation ;  on  the  other  hand,  there  is  height- 
ened attention  to  the  passages  following.  If  with  this,  as  is 
probable,  a  firmer  memorisation  of  the  series  takes  place,  then 
these  moments  have  a  claim  upon  consideration  which  can  only 
be  given  to  them  through  the  measurement  of  the  times. 

Only  when  a  considerable  difference  in  the  results  of  the  two 
kinds  of  tabulation  appears  will  it  be  possible  to  give  one  the 
preference  over  the  other.  That  one  will  then  be  chosen  which 
gives  the  simpler  formulation  of  the  results  in  question. 


The  Method  of  Investigation  3  3 

Section  16.    Periods  of  the  Tests 

The  tests  were  made  in  two  periods,  in  the  years  1879-80  and 
1883-84,  and  extended  each  over  more  than  a  year.  During  a 
long  time  preliminary  experiments  of  a  similar  nature  had 
preceded  the  definite  tests  of  the  first  period,  so  that,  for  all 
results  communicated,  the  time  of  increasing  skill  may  be  con- 
sidered as  past.  At  the  beginning  of  the  second  period  I  was 
careful  to  give  myself  renewed  training.  This  temporal  distri- 
bution of  the  tests  with  a  separating  interval  of  more  than  three 
years  gives  the  desired  possibility  of  a  certain  mutual  control 
of  most  of  the  results.  Frankly,  the  tests  of  the  two  periods 
are  not  strictly  comparable.  In  the  case  of  the  tests  of  the  first 
period,  in  order  to  limit  the  significance  of  the  first  fleeting  grasp1^ 
of  the  series  in  moments  of  special  concentration,  it  was  decided 
to  study  the  series  until  two  successive  faultless  reproductions 
were  possible.  Later  I  abandoned  this  method,  which  only 
incompletely  accomplished  its  purpose,  and  kept  to  the  first  fluent 
reproduction.  The  earlier  method  evidently  in  many  cases  re- 
sulted in  a  somewhat  longer  period  of  learning.  In  addition 
there  was  a  difference  in  the  hours  of  the  day  appointed  for  the 
tests.  Those  of  the  later  period  all  occurred  in  the  afternoon 
hours  between  one  and  three  o'clock ;  those  of  the  earlier  period 
were  unequally  divided  between  the  hours  of  10-11  A.  M.,  11-12 
A.  M.,  and  6-8  P.  M.,  which  for  the  sake  of  brevity  I  shall  desig-  / 
nate  A,  B,  and  C. 


1  Described  in   §   14. 


CHAPTER  IV 
THE  UTILITY  OF  THE  AVERAGES  OBTAINED 

Section  if.     Grouping  of  the  Results  of  the  Tests 

The  first  question  which  awaits  an  answer  from  the  investi- 
gations carried  out  in  the  manner  described  is,  as  explained  in 
sections  7  and  8,  that  of  the  nature  of  the  averages  obtained. 
Are  the  lengths  of  time  required  for  memorising  series  of  a 
certain  length,  under  conditions  as  nearly  identical  as  possible, 
grouped  in  such  a  way  that  we  may  be  justified  in  considering 
their  average  values  as  measures  in  the  sense  pf  physical  science, 
or  are  they  not? 

If  the  tests  are  made  in  the  way  described  above,  namely, 
so  that  several  series  are  always  memorised  in  immediate  suc- 
cession, such  a  type  of  grouping  of  the  time  records  could 
scarcely  be  expected.  For,  as  the  time  devoted  to  learning  at 
a  given  sitting  becomes  extended,  certain  variable  conditions 
in  the  separate  series  come  into  play,  the  fluctuations  of  which 
we  could  not  very  well  expect,  from  what  we  know  of  their 
.nature,  to  be  distributed  symmetrically  around  a  mean  value. 
\  {Accordingly  the  grouping  of  the  results  must  be  an  asymmetrical 

''one  and  cannot  correspond  to  the  "  law  of  error."  Such  con- 
ditions are  the  fluctuations  of  attention  and  the  decreasing  mental 
freshness,  which,  at  first  very  quickly  and  then  more  and  more 
slowly,  gives  way  to  a  certain  mental  fatigue.  There  are  no 
limits,  so  to  speak,  to  the  slowing  down  of  the  learning  pro- 
cesses caused  by  unusual  distractions;  as  a  result  of  these  the 
time  for  learning  a  series  may  occasionally  be  increased  to 
double  that  of  its  average  value  or  more.  The  opposite  effect, 
that  of  an  unusual  exertion,  cannot  in  the  very  nature  of  the 
case  overstep  a  certain  limit.  It  can  never  reduce  the  learning 

•  itime  to  zero. 

If,  however,  groups  of  series  equal  in  number  and  learned  in 
immediate   succession   are    taken,    these    disturbing    influences 

34 


The  Utility  of  tlrie  Averages  Obtained 


35 


may    be    considered    to    have    disappeared    or    practically    so. 
The  decrease  in  mental  vigour  in  one  group  will  be  practically 
the  same  as  that  in  another.    The  positive  and  negative  fluctua- 
tions of  attention  which  under  like  conditions  occur  during  a 
quarter  or  half  hour  are  approximately  the  same  from  day  to 
day.    All  that  is  necessary  to  ask,  then,  is :  Do  the  times  neces^" 
sary   for  learning  equal   groups  of   series   exhibit  the   desired    j 
distribution  ? 

I  can  answer  this  question  in  the  affirmative  with  sufficient 
certainty.  The  two  longest  series,  obtained  under  conditions 
similar  to  each  other,  which  I  possess,  are,  to  be  sure,  not  large 
in  the  abovermentioned  theoretical  sense;  they  suffer,  moreover, 
from  the  disadvantage  that  they  originated  at  times  separated 
by  comparatively  long  intervals  during  which  there  were  neces- 
sarily many  changes  in  the  conditions.  In  spite  of  this,  their 
grouping  comes  as  near  as  could  be  expected  to  the  one  demanded 
by  the  theory. 

The  first  test  series  taken  during  the  years  1879-80  comprises 
92  tests.  Each  test  consisted  in  memorising  eight  series  of  13 
syllables  each,  which  process  of  learning  was  continued  until 
two  reproductions  of  each  series  were  possible.  The  time  re- 
quired for  all  eight  series  taken  together  including  the  time  for 
the  two  reproductions  (but  of  course  not  for  the  pauses,  see 
p.  25,  4)  amounted  to  an  average  of  1,112  seconds  with 
a  probable  error  of  observation  of  ±  76.  The  fluctuations  of  the 
results  were,  therefore,  very  significant:  only  half  of  the  nunv"^ 
bers  obtained  fell  between  the  limits  1,036  and  1,188,  the  other1"' 
half  was  distributed  above  and  below  these  limits.  In  detail  the 
grouping  of  the  numbers  is  as  follows : 


Number  of  deviations 

limits 

within  the 

By  actual 

Calculated 

deviation 

count 

from  theory 

1     T>  17* 
Tff   "•&• 

±       7 

6 

5 

iP.E. 

±      12 

10 

8.2 

}  P.E. 

±     19 

13 

12.3 

\  P  E 

±     38 

30 

24.3 

P.E. 

J-     76 

45 

46.0 

U  P.E. 

±   114 

61 

63.4 

2    P.E. 

±    152 

73 

75.6 

1\  P.E. 

d-   190 

84 

83.6 

3    P.E. 

±  228 

88 

88.0 

36  Memory 

In  the  interval,  y$  P.E.  to  y2  P.E.,  there  occurs  a  slight  piling 
up  of  values  which  is  compensated  for  by  a  greater  lack  in  the 
succeeding  interval,  y*  P.E.  to  P.E.  Apart  from  this,  the  corre- 
spondence between  the  calculated  and  the  actual  results  is  satis- 
factory. The  symmetry  of  the  distribution  leaves  something  to 
/  be  desired.  The  values  below  the  average  preponderate  a  little 
V  in  number,  those  above  preponderate  a  little  in  amount  of  devia- 
tion: only  two  of  the  largest  eight  deviations  are  below  the 
mean  value.  The  influence  of  attention  referred  to  above,  the 
fluctuations  of  which  in  the  separate  series  show  greater  devia- 
tions toward  the  upper  limit  than  toward  the  lower,  has  not, 

A  A 

therefore,  been  quite  compensated  by  the  combination  of  several 
series. 

The  correctness  of  the  observations  and  the  correspondence 
of  their  distributions  with  the  one  theoretically  demanded  are 
greatly  improved  in  the  second  large  series  of  tests.  The  latter 
comprises  the  results  of  84  series  of  tests  taken  during  the 
years  1883-84.  Each  test  consisted  in  memorising  six  series  of 
1 6  syllables  each,  carried  on  in  each  case  to  the  first  errorless 
reproduction.  The  whole  time  necessary  for  this  amounted  to 
1,261  seconds  with  the  probable  error  of  observation  of  ±  48.4 — 
i.e.,  half  of  all  the  84  numbers  fell  within  the  limits  1,213-1,309. 
The  exactness  of  the  observations  thus  had  greatly  increased  as 
compared  with  the  former  series  of  tests:1 

The  interval  included  by  the  probable  error  amounts  to  only 
7^/2  per  cent  of  the  mean  value  as  against  14  per  cent  in  the 
earlier  tests.  In  detail  the  numbers  are  distributed  as  follows: 


1Of  course,  the  exactness  obtained  here  cannot  stand  comparison  with 
physical  measurements,  but  it  can  very  well  be  compared  with  physiolog- 
ical ones,  which  would  naturally  be  the  first  to  be  thought  of  in  this  con- 
nection. To  the  most  exact  of  physiological  measurements  belong  the  last 
determinations  of  the  speed  of  nervous  transmission  made  by  Helmhqltz 
and  Baxt.  One  record  of  these  researches  published  as  an  illustration 
of  their  accuracy  (Mon.  Ber.  d.  Berl.  Akad.  1870,  S.  191)  after  proper  cal- 
culation gives  a  mean  value  of  4.268  with  the  probable  error  of  observa- 
tion, o.ioi.  The  interval  it  includes  amounts,  therefore,  to  5  per  cent  of 
the  mean  value.  All  former  determinations  are  much  more  inaccurate. 
In  the  case  of  the  most  accurate  test-series  of  the  first  measurements  made 
by  Helmholtz,  that  interval  amounts  to  about  50  per  cent  of  the  mean 
value  (Arch.  f.  Anat.  u..  Physiol.  1850,  S.  340).  'Even  Physics,  in  the  case 
of  its  pioneer  investigations,  has  often  been  obliged  to  put  up  with  a  less 
degree  of  accuracy  in  its  numerical  results.  In  the  case  of  his  first  deter- 
minations of  the  mechanical  equivalent  of  heat  Joule  found  the  number 
838,  with  a  probable  error  of  observation  of  97.  (Phil.  Mag.,  1843,  p. 
435  ff.) 


The  Utility  of  the  Averages  Obtained 


37 


Number  of  deviations 

Within  the 

limits 

the 

By  actual 

Calculated 

deviation 

count 

from  theory 

^r  P.E. 

±       4 

4 

4.5 

i  P.E. 

±       8 

7 

7.6 

JP.E. 

±     12 

12 

11  3 

iP.E. 

±     24 

23 

22.2 

P.E. 

±     48 

44 

42.0 

li  p  JE. 

±     72 

57 

57.8 

2    P.E. 

±     96 

68 

69.0 

2^  P.E. 

±   121 

75 

76.0 

3    P.E. 

±   145 

81 

80.0 

1 

The  symmetry  of  distribution  is  here  satisfactorily  maintained 
apart  from  the  numbers,  which  are  unimportant  on  account  of 
their  smallness. 

Deviations 


limits 

Above 

Below 

t  P.E. 

5 

2 

i  P.E. 

7 

5 

APE 

13 

10 

P.E! 

20 

24 

li  P.E. 

28 

29 

2    P.E. 

34 

34 

2*  P.E. 

37 

38. 

3    P.E. 

40 

41 

The  deviation  which  is  greatest  absolutely  is  toward  the  lower 
limit. 

If  several  of  our  series  of  syllables  were  combined  into  groups 
and  then  memorised  separately,  the  length  of  time  necessary  to 
memorise  a  whole  group  varied  greatly,  to  be  sure,  when  repeated 
tests  were  taken;  but,  in  spite  of  this,  when  taken  as  a  whole 
(they  varied  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  of  the  measures  of  the 
ideally  homogeneous  processes  of  natural  science,  which  also 
vary  from  each  other.  So,  at  least  in  experimental  fashion,  it, 
is  allowable  to  use  the  mean  values  obtained  from  the  numerical 
results  for  the  various  tests  in  order  to  establish  the  existence 
of  causal  relations  just  as  natural  science  does  that  by  means  of 
its  constants. 

The  number  of  series  of  syllables  which  is  to  be  combined  into 


Memory 


a  single  group,  or  test,  is  naturally,  .indeterminate.'  It  must  be 
expected,  however,  that  as  the  number  increases,  the  correspond- 
ence between  the  distribution  of  the  times  actually  found  and 
those  calculated  in  accordance  with  the  law  of  errors  will  be 
greater.  In  practice  the  attempt  will  be  made  to  increase  the 
number  to  such  a  point  that  further  increase  and  the  closer 
correspondence  resulting  will  no  longer  compensate  for  the  time 
required  If  the  number  of  the  series  in  a  given  test  is  lessened, 
Jk€*aesired  correspondence  will  also  presumably  decrease.  How- 
ever, it  is  desirable  that  even  then  the  approximation  to  the 
theoretically  demanded  distribution  remain  perceptible. 

Even  this  requirement  is  fulfilled  by  the  numerical  values 
obtained.  In  the  two  largest  series  of  tests  just  described,  I 
have  examined  the  varying  length  of  time  necessary  for  the 
memorisation  of  the  first  half  of  each  test.  In  the  older  series, 
these  are  the  periods  required  by  each  4  series  of  syllables,  in 
the  more  recent  series  the  periods  required  by  each  3  of  them 
taken  together.  The  results  are  as  follows: 

i.  In  the  former  series :  mean  value  (ra)=533  (P.E.o)=±5i. 


DISTRIBUTION  OF  THE  SEPARATE  VALUES 


Within  the 
limits 

i.e.,  within 
the 
deviation 

Number  of  deviations 

Of  these  deviations 
there  occur 

By  actual 
count 

Calculated 
from  theory 

Below 

Above 

A  P.E. 
iP.E. 
JP.E. 
iP.E. 
P.E. 
1}P.E. 
2    P.E. 
2£  P.E. 
3    P.E. 

±       5 
±       8 
±     12 
±     25 
±     51 
±     76 
±   102 
±   127 
±   153 

2 
4 
6 
21 
48 
61 
76 
85 
89 

5.0 
8.2 
12.3 
24.3 
46.0 
63.4 
75.6 
83.6 
88.0 

2 
3 
4 
9 
24 
30 
37 
42 
45 

0 
1 
2 
12 
24 
31 
39 
43 
44 

The  Utility  of  the  Averages  Obtained 
2.  In  the  later  series:  w  =  62o,  P.E.0=±44. 
DISTRIBUTION  OF  THE  SEPARATE  VALUES 


39 


Within  the 
limits 

i.e.,  within 
the 
deviation 

Number  of  deviations 

Of  these  deviations 
there  occur 

By  actual 
count 

Calculated 
from  theory 

Below 

Above 

1?i 

iP.E. 
*P.E. 
W£P.E. 

if  P.E. 

2    P.E. 
2*  P.E. 
3    P.E. 

±       4 
±       7 
±     11 
±     22 
±     44 
±     66 
±     88 
±   110 
±   132 

3 
5 
11 
25 
44 
56 
71 
76 
79 

4.5 
7.6 
11.3 
22.2 
42.0 
57.8 
69.0 
76.0 
80.0 

1 
3 
6 
13 
21 
29 
38 
41 
42 

2 
2 
5 
12 
23 
27 
33 
35 
37 

By  both  tables  the  supposition  mentioned  above  of  the  existence 
of  a  less  perfect  but  still  perceptible  correspondence  between  the 
observed  and  calculated  distribution  of  the  numbers  is  well  con- 
firmed. 

Exactly  the  same  approximate  correspondence  must  be  pre- 
supposed if,  instead  of  decreasing  the  number  of  series  combined 
into  a  test,  the  total  number  of  tests  is  made  smaller.  In  this 
case  also  I  will  add  some  confirmatory  summaries. 

I  possess  two  long  test  series,  made  at  the  time  of  the  earlier 
tests,  which  were  obtained  under  the  same  conditions  as  the 
above  mentioned  series  but  at  the  later  times  of  the  day,  B.  and  C. 

One  of  these,  B,  comprised  39  tests  of  6  series  each,  the  other, 
C,  38  tests  of  8  series  each,  each  series  containing  13  syllables. 
The  results  obtained  were  as  follows : 


40  Memory 

i.  For  the  tests  at  time  B:  w=  871,  P.E.0=  ±  63. 
DISTRIBUTION  OF  THE  SEPARATE  VALUES 


Within  the 

Number  of  deviations 

1  *  «"••»*  4  « 

Counted 

Calculated 

1  P.E. 

4 

5 

*P.E. 

10 

10.3 

P.E. 

21 

19.5 

li  P.E. 

28 

26.8 

2    P.E. 

32 

32.0 

2£  P.E. 

35 

35.4 

3    P.E. 

37 

37.3 

2.  For  the  tests  of  time  C :  m  =  1,258,  P.E.0=  ±  60. 
DISTRIBUTION  OF  THE  SEPARATE  VALUES 


Within  the 


Number  of  deviations 


uuuwa 

Counted 

Calculated 

iP.E. 

7 

5.0 

*P.E. 

10 

10.0 

P.E. 

19 

19.0 

1*  P.E. 

26 

26.0 

2    P.E. 

31 

31.0 

2£  P.E. 

34 

34.5 

3    P.E. 

36 

36.4 

In  addition  I  mention  a^senesjDf  only  twentyjests,  with  which 
I  shall  conclude  this  summary:  Each  test  consisted  of  the 
learning  of  eight  separate  series  of  thirteen  syllables  each,  which 
had  been  memorised  once  one  month  before.  The  average  was 
in  this  case  892  seconds  with  a  probable  error  of  observation  of 
54.  The  single  values  were  grouped  as  follows: 


Within  the 


Number  of  deviations 


Counted 

Calculated 

1  P.E. 

3 

2.7 

*P.E. 

5 

5.3 

P.E. 

10 

10.0 

H  p-E. 

12 

13.8 

2    P.E. 

17 

16.5 

2£  P.E. 

19 

18.2 

3    P.E. 

20 

19.1 

The  Utility  of  the  Averages  Obtained  41 

Although  the  number  of  the  tests  was  so  small,  the  accordance 
between  the  calculation  by  theory  and  the  actual  count  of  devia- 
tions is  in  all  these  cases  so  close  that  the  usefulness  of  the  mean 
values  will  be  admitted,  the  wide  limits  of  error  being,  of  course, 
taken  into  consideration. 

Section  18.    Grouping  of  the  Results  of  the  Separate  Series 

The  previously  mentioned  hypotheses  concerning  the  grouping 
of  the  times  necessary  for  learning  the  separate  series  were 
naturally  not  merely  theoretical  suppositions,  but  had  already 
been  confirmed  by  the  groupings  actually  found.  The  two  large 
series  of  tests  mentioned  above,  one  consisting  of  92  tests  of 
eight  single  series  each,  and  the  other  of  84  tests  of  6  single 
series  each,  thus  giving  736  and  504  separate  values  respectively, 
afford  a  sufficiently  broad  basis  for  judgment.  Both  groups  of 
numbers,  and  both  in  the  same  way,  show  the  following 
peculiarities : 

1.  The  distribution  of  the  arithmetical  values  above  their  mean 
is  considerably  looser  and  extends  farther  than  below  the  mean. 
The  most  extreme  values  above  lie  2  times  and  1.8  times,  re- 
spectively, as  far  from  the  mean  as  the  most  distant  of  those 
below. 

2.  As  a  result  of  this  dominance  by  the  higher  numbers  the 
mean  is  displaced  upward  from  the  region  of  the  densest  dis- 
tribution, and  as  a  result  the  deviations  below  get  the  preponder- 
ance in  number.    There  occur  respectively  404  and  266  deviations 
below  as  against  329  and  230  above. 

3.  The  number  of  deviations  from  the  region  of  densest  dis- 
tribution towards  both  limits  does  not  decrease  uniformly — as 
one  would  be  very  much  inclined  to  expect  from  the  relatively 
large  numbers  combined — but  several  maxima  and  minima  of 
density  are  distinctly  noticeable.    Therefore  constant  sources  of 
error  were  at  work  in  the  production  of  the  separate  values — 

~fc?.",  in  the  memorisation  of  the  separate  series.  These  resulted 
on  the  one  hand  in  an  unsymmetrical  distribution  of  the  num- 
bers, and  on  the  other  hand  in  an  accumulation  of  them  in  certain 
regions.  In  accordance  with  the  investigations  already  presented 
in  this  chapter,  it  can  only  be  supposed  that  these  influences  com- 
pensated each  other  when  the  values  of  several  series  learned  in 
succession  were  combined. 


Memory 


I  have  already  mentioned  as  the  probable  cause  of  this  unsym- 
metrical  distribution  the  peculiar  variations  in  the  effect  of  high 
degrees  of  concentration  of  attention  and  distraction.  It  would 
naturally  be  supposed  that  the  position  of  the  separate  series 
within  each  test  is  the  cause  of  the  repeated  piling  up  of  values 
on  each  side  of  the  average.  If,  in  the  case  of  a  large  test-series, 
the  values  are  summed  up  for  the  first,  the  second,  and  third 
series,  etc.,  and  the  average  of  each  is  taken,  these  average  values 
vary  greatly,  as  might  be  expected.  The  separate  values  are 
grouped  about  their  mean  with  only  tolerable  approximation 
to  the  law  of  error,  but  yet  they  are,  on  the  whole,  distributed 
most  densely  in  its  region,  and  these  separate  regions  of  dense 
distribution  must  of  course  appear  in  the  total  result. 


MO  c- 


140 


I  H  777  jy  y  ~yj  ~&H          ~SHT 

The  following  may  be  added  by  way  of  supplement :  on  account 
of  the  mental  fatigue  which  increases  gradually  during  the  course 
of  a  test-series  the  mean  values  ought  to  increase  with  the  num- 
ber of  the  series ;  but  this  does  not  prove  to  be  the  case. 

Only  in  one  case  have  I  been  able  to  notice  anything  corre- 
sponding to  this  hypothesis,  namely,  in  the  large  and  therefore 
important  series  of  92  tests  consisting  of  eight  series  of  13 
syllables  each.  In  this  case  the  mean  values  for  the  learning 
of  the  92  first  series,  the  92  second  series,  etc.,  were  found  to 
be  105,  140,  142,  146,  146,  148,  144,  140  seconds,  the  relative 
lengths  of  which  Fig.  2  exhibits.  For  all  the  rest  of  the  cases 
which  I  investigated  the  typical  fact  is,  on  the  contrary,  rather 
such  a  course  of  the  numbers  as  was  true  in  the  case  of  the 


The  Utility  of  the  Averages  Obtained 


43 


series  of  84  tests  of  six  series  of  16  syllables  each  and  as  is 
shown  in  Fig.  3. 

The  mean  values  here  were  191,  224,  206,  218,  210,  213  sec- 
onds. They  start  in,  as  may  be  seen,  considerably  below  the 
average,  but  rise  immediately  to  a  height  which  is  not  again 
reached  in  the  further  course  of  the  test,  and  they  then  oscillate 


220 


210 


zoo 


790 1 


m         a 


rather  decidedly.  An  analogous  course  is  shown  by  the  numbers 
in  the  7  tests  of  nine  12-syllable  series,  namely:  71,  90,  98,  87, 
98,  90,  ioi,  86,  69  (Fig.  4). 


m 


Furthermore  the  values  for  39  tests  of  six  series  of  13  syllables 
each  obtained  in  time  B  were  as  follows:  118,  150,  158,  147,  155, 
144  (Fig.  5  lower  curve). 

Those  for  38  tests  with  eight  13  syllable  series  of  time  C  were 
139.  159,  167,  168,  160,  150,  162,  153  (Fig.  5  upper  curve). 

Finally  the  numbers  obtained  from  seven  tests  with  six  stanzas 
of  Byron's  "Don  Juan"  were:  189,  219,  171,  204,  183,  229. 


44 


Memory 


Even  in  the  case  of  the  first  mentioned  contradictory  group 
of  tests  J3.  grouping  of  the  separate  mean  values  harmonising  with 
the  normal  one  occurs  if,  instead  of  all  the  92  tests  being  taken 
into  consideration  at  once,  they  are  divided  into  several  parts — 
i.e.,  if  tests  are  combined  which  were  taken  at  about  the  same 
time  and  under  about  the  same  conditions. 

The  conclusion  cannot  be  drawn  from  these  numerical  results 
that  the  mental  fatigue  which  gradually  increased  during  the 
twenty  minute  duration  of  the  tests  did  not  exert  any  influence. 

It  can  only  be  said  that  the  supposed  influence  of  the  latter 
upon  the  numbers  is  far  outweighed  by  another  tendency  which 


160 


ISO 


would  not  a  priori  be  so  readily  suspected,  namely  the  tendency 
of  comparatively  low  values  to  be  followed  by  comparatively  high 
ones  and  vice  versa.  There  seems  to  exist  a  kind  of  periodical 
oscillation  of  mental  receptivity  or  attention  in  ^OTm"ection~wfth 
which  the  increasing  fatigue  expresses  itself  by  fluctuations 
around  a  median  position  which  is  gradually  displaced.1 

1  If  it  should  ever  become  a  matter  of  interest,  the  attempt  might  be 
made  to  define  numerically  the  different  effects  of  that  tendency  in  differ- 
ent cases.  For  the  probable  errors  of  observation  for  the  numerical 
values  of  series-groups  afford  a  measure  for  the  influence  of  accidental 
disturbances  to  which  the  memorisation  is  daily  exposed.  If  now  the 
learning  of  the  separate  series  in  general  were  exposed  to  the  same  or 
similar  variations  of  condition  as  occur  from  test  to  test,  then  according 
to  the  fundamental  principles  of  the  theory  of  errors,  a  probable  error  of 
observation  calculated  directly  from  the  separate  values  would  relate  itself 
to  the  one  just  mentioned  as  I  to  v"rT,  where  "  n  "  denotes  the  number  of 
separate  series  combined  into  a  test.  If,  however,  as  is  the  case  here, 
special  influences  assert  themselves  during  the  memorisation  of  these 


The  Utility  of  the  Averages  Obtained  45 

After  orienting  ourselves  thus  concerning  the  nature  and  value 
of  the  numerical  results  gained  from  the  complete  memorisa- 
tions,  we  shall  now  turn  to  the  real  purpose  of  the  investigation, 
namely  the  numerical  description  of  causal  relations. 

separate  series,  and  if  such  influences  tend  to  separate  the  values  further 
than  other  variations  of  conditions  would  do,  the  "  P.E.0  "  calculated  from 
the  separate  values  must  turn  out  somewhat  too  great,  and  the  just  men- 
tioned proportion  consequently  too  small,  and  the  stronger  the  influences 
are,  the  more  must  this  be  the  case. 

An  examination  of  the  actual  relations  is,  to  be  sure,  a  little  difficult, 
but  fully  confirms  the  statements.  In  the  84  tests,  consisting  of  six  series 
of  16  syllables  each,  the  Vn":=2.45.  We  found  48.4  to  be  the  probable 
error  of  observation  of  the  84  tests.  The  probable  error  of  the  504  sep- 
arate values  is  31.6.  The  quotient  31.6:  48.4  is  1.53;  therefore  not  quite 
2/3  of  the  value  of  VrT. 


CHAPTER  V 

RAPIDITY  OF  LEARNING  SERIES  OF  SYLLABLES 
AS  A  FUNCTION  OF  THEIR  LENGTH 

Section  ip.     Tests  Belonging  to  the  Later  Period 

I  It  is  sufficiently  well  known  that  the  memorisation  of  a  series 
of  ideas  that  is  to  be  reproduced  at  a  later  time  is  more  difficult, 
the  longer  the  series  is.  That  is,  the  memorisation  not  only 
requires  more  time  taken  by  itself,  because  each  repetition  lasts 
i  longer,  but  it  also  requires  more  time  relatively  because  an  in- 
creased number  of  repetitions  becomes  necessary.  Six  verses 
of  a  poem  require  for  learning  not  only  three  times  as  much 
time  as  two  but  considerably  more  than  that. 

I  did  not  investigate  especially  this  relation  of  dependence, 
which  of  course  becomes  evident  also  in  the  first  possible  repro- 
duction of  series  of  nonsense  syllables,  but  incidentally  I  ob- 
tained a  few  numerical  values  for  it  which  are  worth  putting 
down,  although  they  do  not  show  particularly  interesting 
relations. 

The  series  in  question  comprised  (in  the  case  of  the  tests  of 
the  year  1883-84),  12,  16,  24,  or  36  syllables  each,  and 

9,     6,     3,  or    2  series  were  each  time  com- 
bined into  a  test. 

For  the  number  of  repetitions  necessary  in  these  cases  to 
memorise  the  series  up  to  the  first  errorless  reproduction  (and 
including  it)  the  following  numerical  results  were  found: 


Required  together 

Probable  error 

Number 

X  series 

Y  syllables 

an  average  of 

of 

of 

each 

Z  repetitions 

average  values 

tests 

i 

X= 

Y  — 

z=  n.iv.  < 

9 

12 

158 

±  3.4 

7 

6 

16 

C    )   186 

±  0.9 

42 

3 

24 

134.  £/  fa 

±  2.9 

7 

2 

36 

?  |-TI2  &  y 

±  4.0 

7 

46 


Rapidity  of  Learning  Series  of  Syllables  47 

In  order  to  make  the  number  of  repetitions  comparable  it  is 
necessary,  so  to  speak,  to  reduce  them  to  a  common  denominator  ^  - 
and  to  divide  them  each  time  by  the  number  of  the  series.  In 
this  way  it  is  found  out  how  many  repetitions  relatively  were 
necessary  to  learn  by  heart  the  single  series,  which  differ  from 
each  other  only  in  the  number  of  syllables,  and  which  each 
time  had  been  taken  together  with  as  many  others  of  the  same 
kind  as  would  make  the  duration  of  the  whole  test  from  fifteen 
to  thirty  minutes.1 

However,  a  conclusion  can  be  drawn  from  the  figures  from  the 
standpoint  of  decrease  in  number  of  syllables.  The  question  can 
be  asked :  xtWhat  number  of  syllables  can  be  correctly  recited 
after  only  one  reading?  ^For  me  the  number  is  usually  seven. 
Indeed  I  have  often  succeeded  in  reproducing  eight  syllables,  but 
this  has  happened  only  at  the  beginning  of  the  tests  and  in  a 
decided  minority  of  the  cases.  In  the  case  of  six  syllables  on 
the  other  hand  a  mistake  almost  never  occurs ;  with  them,  there- 
fore, a  single  attentive  reading  involves  an  unnecessarily  large 
expenditure  of  energy  for  an  immediately  following  reproduction.1 

If  this  latter  pair  of  values  is  added,  the  required  division 
made,  and  the  last  faultless  reproduction  subtracted  as  not 
necessary  for  the  learning,  then  the  following  table  results. 


t  -U^iAv  *! 


Number  of  repetitions 

Number  of  necessary  for  first  Probable 

syllables  errorless  reproduction  error 

in  a  series  (exclusive  of  it) 

12  16.6  ±1.1 

16  ,'    30.0  ±0.4 

24  I    44.0  ±   1.7 

36  '    55.0  ±  2.8 


'The  objection  might  be  made  that,  by  means  of  this  division,  recourse 
is  made  directly  to  the  averages  for  the  memorising  of  the  single  series, 
and  that  in  this  way  the  result  of  the  Fourth  Chapter  is  disregarded.  For, 
according  to  that,  the  averages  of  the  numbers  obtained  from  groups  of 
series  could  indeed  be  used  for  investigation  into  relations  of  dependence, 
but  the  averages  obtained  from  separate  series  could  not  be  so  used.  ^  I  do 
not  claim,  however,  that  the  above  numbers,  thus  obtained  by  division, 
form  the  correct  average  for  the  numbers  belonging  to  the  separate  series, 
i.e.,  that  the  latter  group  themselves  according  to  the  law  of  errors.  But 
the  numbers  are  to  be  considered  as  averages  for  groups  of  series,  and,  for 
the  sake  of  a  better  comparison  with  others — a  condition  which  in  the 
nature  of  the  case  could  not  be  everywhere  the  same — is  made  the  same 
by  division.  The  probable  error,  the  measure  of  their_  accuracy,  has  not 
been  calculated  from  the  numbers  for  the  separate  series  but  from  those 
for  the  groups  of  series. 


48  Memory 

The  longer  of  the  two  adjoining  curves  of  Fig.  6  illustrates 
the  regular  course  of  these  numbers  with  approximate  accuracy 
for  such  a  small  number  of  tests.  As  Fig.  6  shows,  in  the  cases 
examined,  the  number  of  repetitions  necessary  for  the  memorisa- 
tion of  series  in  which  the  number  of  syllables  progressively 
increased,  itself  increases  with  extraordinary  rapidity  with  the 
increase  in  number  of  the  syllables. 

At  first  the  ascent  of  the  curve  is  very  steep,  but  later  on  it 
appears  to  gradually  flatten  out.  For  the  mastery  of  five  times 


JO 


^o 


JO 


—rig.6- 


it-fir/Mmiliiiiliiiiliiiiliiiilinil 

0  '  10  40 


the  number  of  syllables  that  can  be  reproduced  after  but  one 
reading — i.e.,  after  about  3  seconds — over  50  repetitions  were 
necessary,  requiring  an  uninterrupted  and  concentrated  effort 
for  fifteen  minutes. 

The  curve  has  its  natural  starting  point  in  the  zero  point  of 
the  co-ordinates.  The  short  initial  stretch  up  to  the  point, 
x  — 7>  y  —  J>  can  be  explained  thus:  in  order  to  recite  by  heart 
series  of  6,  5,  4,  etc.,  syllables  one  reading,  of  course,  is  all  that 
is  necessary.  In  my  case  this  reading  does  not  require  as 
much  attention  as  does  the  /-syllable  one,  but  can  become  more 
and  more  superficial  as  the  number  of  syllables  decreases. 


Rapidity  of  Learning  Series  of  Syllables 


49 


Section  20.  Tests  Belonging  to  the  Earlier  Period 
It  goes  without  saying  that  since  the  results  reported  were 
obtained  from  only  one  person  they  have  meaning  only  as  related 
to  him.  The  question  arises  whether  they  are  for  this  individual 
of  a  general  significance — i.e.,  whether,  by  repetition  of  the  tests 
at  another  time,  they  could  be  expected  to  show  approximately 
the  same  amount  and  grouping. 

A  series  of  results  from  the  earlier  period  furnishes  the  de- 
sired possibility  of  a  control  in  this  direction.     They,  again, 
have  been  obtained  incidentally   (consequently  uninfluenced  by 
expectations  and  suppositions)  and  from  tests  made  under  dif- 
ferent  conditions   than   those  mentioned.     These   earlier  tests 
occurred  at  an  earlier  hour  of  the  day  and  the  learning  was 
continued  until  the  separate  series  could  be  recited  twice  in 
succession  without  mistake.     A  test  comprised 
15  series  of  10  syllables  each, 
or    8      "       "    13 
or    6      "      "    16 
or    4      "      "    19 

So,  again,  four  different  lengths  of  series  have  been  taken 
into  account,  but  their  separate  values  lie  much  closer  together. 

Since  the  repetitions — which  are  in  question  here — were  not 
counted  at  all  in  the  earlier  period,  their  number  had  to  be  cal- 
culated from  the  times.  For  this  purpose  the  table  on  p.  31 
has  been  used  after  corresponding  interpolation.  If  the  num- 
bers found  are  immediately  reduced  to  one  series  each,  and  if 
along  with  it  the  two  repetitions  representing  the  recitation  are 
subtracted  as  above,  we  obtain : 


Number  of 
syllables 
in  a  series 

Number  of  repetitions 
necessary  for  two 
errorless  reproductions 
(exclusive  of  them) 

Probable 
error1 

Number 
of  tests 

10 
13 
16 
19 

13 
23 
32 

38 

±   1. 
±  0.5 
±   1.2 

±  2.0 

16 
92 
6 
11 

1The   probable   errors   are  based   upon   calculation   and   have   only   an 
approximate  value. 


50  Memory 

The  smaller  curve  of  Fig.  6  exhibits  graphically  the  arrange- 
ment of  these  numbers.  As  may  be  seen,  the  number  of  repeti- 
tions necessary  for  learning  equally  long  series  was  a  little  larger 
in  the  earlier  period  than  in  the  later  one.  Because  of  its  uni- 
formity this  relation  is  to  be  attributed  to  differences  in  the 
experimental  conditions,  to  inaccuracies  in  the  calculations,  and 
perhaps  also  to  the  increased  training  of  the  later  period.  The 
older  numbers  fall  very  close  to  the  position  of  the  later  ones, 
and — what  is  of  chief  importance — the  two  curves  lie  as  closely 
together  throughout  the  short  extent  of  their  common  course 
as  could  be  desired  for  tests  separated  by  3^  years  and  un- 
affected by  any  presuppositions.  There  is  a  high  degree  of  prob- 
ability, then,  in  favor  of  the  supposition  that  the  relations  of 
dependence  presented  in  those  curves,  since  they  remained  con- 
stant over  a  long  interval  of  time,  are  to  be  considered  as  char- 
acteristic for  the  person  concerned,  although  they  are,  to  be 
sure,  only  individual. 

Section  21.     Increase  in  Rapidity  of  Learning  in  the  Case  of 
Meaningful  Material 

In  order  to  keep  in  mind  the  similarities  and  differences  be- 
tween sense  and  nonsense  material,  I  occasionally  made  tests 
with  the  English  original  of  Byron's  "  Don  Juan."  These 
results  do  not  properly  belong  here  since  I  did  not  vary  the 
length  of  the  amount  to  be  learned  each  time  but  memorised 
on  each  occasion  only  separate  stanzas.  Nevertheless,  it  is  in- 
teresting to  mention  the  number  of  repetitions  necessary  because 
of  their  contrast  with  the  numerical  results  just  given. 

There  are  only  seven  tests  (1884)  to  be  considered,  each  of 
which  comprised  six  stanzas.  When  the  latter,  each  by  itself, 
were  learned  to  the  point  of  the  first  possible  reproduction,  an 
average  of  52  repetitions  (P.E.m=-j-O.6)  was  necessary  for  all 
six  taken  together.  Thus,  each  stanza  required  hardly  nine  repe- 
titions; or,  if  the  errorless  reproduction  is  abstracted,  scarcely 
eight  repetitions.1 

1  For  the  sake  of  correct  evaluation  of  the  numbers  and  correct  connec- 
tion with  possible  individual  observations,  please  note  p.  24,  i. 
In  order  to  procure  uniformity  of  method  the  stanzas  were  always 
read  through  from  beginning  to  end ;  more  difficult  passages  were  not 
learned  separately  and  then  inserted.  If  that  had  been  done,  the  times 
would  have  been  much  shorter  and  nothing  could  have  been  said  about 


Rapidity  of  Learning  Series  of  Syllables  5 1 

If  it  is  born  in  mind  that  each  stanza  contains  80  syllables 
(each  syllable,  however,  consisting  on  the  average  of  less  than 
three  letters)  and  if  the  number  of  repetitions  here  found  is 
compared  with  the  results  presented  above,  there  is  obtained  an 
approximate  numerical  expression  for  the  extraordinary  advan-  r' 
tage  which  the  combined  ties  of  meaning,  rhythm,  rhyme, 
a  common  language  give  to  material  to  be  memorised.  If  the 
above  curve  is  projected  in  imagination  still  further  along  its  pres- 
ent course,  then  it  must  be  supposed  that  I  would  have  required  70 
to  80  repetitions  for  the  memorisation  of  a  series  of  80  to  90 
nonsense  syllables.  When  the  syllables  were  objectively  and  sub-" 
jectively  united  by  the  ties  just  mentioned  this  requirement  was  /  ' 
in  my  case  reduced  to  about  one-tenth  of  that  amount. 

the  number  of  repetitions.  Of  course  the  reading  was  done  at  a  uniform 
rate  of  speed  as  far  as  possible,  but  not  in  the  slow  and  mechanically 
regulated  time  that  was  employed  for  the  series  of  syllables.  The  regula- 
tion of  speed  was  left  to  free  estimation.  A  single  reading  of  one  stanza 
required  20  to  23  seconds. 


CHAPTER  VI 

RETENTION  AS  A  FUNCTION  OF  THE  NUMBER  OF 
REPETITIONS 

Section  22.    Statement  of  the  Problem 

The  result  of  the  fourth  chapter  was  as  follows:  When  in 
repeated  cases  I  memorised  series  of  syllables  of  a  certain  length 
to  the  point  of  their  first  possible  reproduction,  the  times,  (or 
number  of  repetitions)  necessary  differed  greatly  from  each 
other,  but  the  mean  values  derived  from  them  had  the  character 
of  genuine  constants  of  natural  science.  Ordinarily,  therefore, 
I  learned  by  heart  homogeneous  series  under  similar  conditions 
with,  on  the  average,  a  similar  number  of  repetitions..  The  large 
deviations  of  the  separate  values  from  each  other/ change  the 
total  result  not  at  all;  but  it  would  require  too  much  time  to 
ascertain  with  exactness  the  number  necessary  for  greater  pre- 
cision in  detail. 

What  will  happen,  it  may  be  asked,  if  the  number  of  repe- 
titions actually  given  to  a  certain  series  is  less  than  is  required 
for  memorisation  or  if  the  number  exceeds  the  necessary 
minimum  ? 

The  general  nature  of  what  happens  has  already  been  de- 
scribed. Naturally  the  surplus  repetitions  of  the  latter  alterna- 
tive do  not  go  to  waste.  Even  though  the  immediate  effect,  the 
smooth  and  errorless  reproduction,  is  not  affected  by  them,  yet 
they  are  not  without  significance  in  that  they  serve  to  make  other 
such  reproductions  possible  at  a  more  or  less  distant  time.  The 
longer  a  person  studies,  the  longer  he  retains.  And,  even  in  the 
first  case,  something  evidently  occurs  even  if  the  repetitions  do 
V  not  suffice  for  a  free  reproduction.  By  them  a  way  is  at  least 
opened  for  the  first  errorless  reproduction,  and  the  disconnected, 
hesitating,  and  faulty  reproductions  keep  approximating  more 
and  more  to  it, 

These  relations  can  be  described  figuratively  by  speaking  of  the 

52 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  the  Number  of  Repetitions        53 

series  as  being  more  or  less  deeply  engraved  in  some  mental  sub- 
stratum.   To  carry  out  this  figure:  as  the  number  of  repetitions^ 
increases,  the  series  are  engraved  more  'and  more  deeply  and  j 
indelibly;  if  the  number  of  repetitions  is  small,  the  inscription 
is  but  surface  deep  and  only  fleeting  glimpses  of  the  tracery  can 
be  caught ;  with  a  somewhat  greater  number  the  inscription  can, 
for  a  time  at  least,  be  read  at  will ;  as  the  number  of  repetitions 
is  still  further  increased,  the  deeply  cut  picture  of  the  series 
fades  out  only  after  ever  longer  intervals. 

What  is  to  be  said  in  case  a  person  is  not  satisfied  with  this 
general  statement  of  a  relation  of  dependence  between  the  num- 
ber of  repetitions  and  the  depth  of  the  mental  impression  ob- 
tained, and  if  he  demands  that  it  be  defined  more  clearly  and 
in  detail?  The  thermometer  rises  with  increasing  temperature, 
the  magnetic  needle  is  displaced  to  an  increasing  angle  as  the 
intensity, of  the  electric  current  around  it  increases.  But  while 
the  mercury  always  rises  by  equal  spaces  for  each  equal  increase 
in  temperature,  the  increase  of  the  angle  showing  the  displace- 
ment of  the  magnetic  needle  becomes  less  with  a  like  increase 
in  the  electric  current.  Which  analogy  is  it  which  holds  for  the 
effect  of  the  number  of  repetitions  of  the  series  to  be  memorised 
upon  the  depth  of  the  resulting  impression?  Without  further 
discussion  shall  we  make  it  proportional  to  the  number  of  repe- 
titions, and  accordingly  say  that  it  is  twice  or  three  times  as 
great  when  homogenous  series  are  repeated  with  the  same  degree 
of  attention  twice  or  thrice  as  many  times  as  are  others?  Or 
does  it  increase  less  and  less  with  each  and  every  constant  increase 
in  the  jmmber  of  repetitions?  Or  what  does  happen? 

Evidently  this  question  is  a  good  one;  its  answer  would  be 
of  theoretical  as  well  as  practical  interest  and  importance.  But 
with  the  resources  hitherto  at  hand  it  could  not  be  answered, 
nor  even  investigated.  Even  its  meaning  will  not  be  quite  clear 
so  long  as  the  words  "  inner  stability  "  and  "  depth  of  impression  " 
denote  something  indefinite  and  figurative  rather  than  something 
clear  and  objectively  defined. 

Applying  the  principles  developed  in  section  5,  I  define  the 
inner  stability  of  a  series  of  ideas— the^degree  of  its  retainability 
—by  the  greater  or  less  readiness  with  which  it  is  reproduced  at 
some  definite  time  subsequent  to  its  first  memorisation.  This 
readiness  I  measure  by  the  amount  of  work  saved  in  the  re- 


54  Memory 

learning,  of  any  series  as  compared  with  the  work  necessary 
for  memorising  a  similar  but  entirely  new  series. 

The  interval  of  time  between  the  two  processes  of  memorisa- 
tion is  of  course  a  matter  of  choice.  I  chose  24  hours. 

Since  in  the  case  of  this  definition  we  are  not  trying  to  settle 
a  matter  of  general  linguistic  usage,  it  cannot  be  properly  asked 
whether  it  is  correct,  but  only  whether  it  serves  the  purpose, 
or,  at  the  most,  whether  it  is  applicable  to  the  indefinite  ideas 
connected  with  the  notion  of  different  depths  of  mental  im- 
pression. The  latter  will  probably  be  granted.  But  nothing  can 
be  said  in  advance  as  to  how  well  it  fulfills  its  purpose.  That 
dan  be  judged  only  after  more  extensive  results  have  been  ob- 
tained. And  the  character  of  the  judgment  will  depend  to  a 
great  extent  on  whether  the  results  obtained  with  the  help  of 
this  means  of  measurement  fulfill  the  primary  demand  which 
we  make  with  reference  to  any  system  of  measurement.  It 
consists  in  this, — that  if  any  change  whatever  is  made  in  the 
controllable  conditions  of  that  scale,  the  results  obtained 
by  the  scale  in  its  new  form  can  be  reduced  to  those  of  the  old 
form  by  multiplication  by  some  one  constant.  In  our  present 
case,  for  example,  it  would  consequently  be  necessary  to  know 
whether  the  character  of  the  results  would  remain  the  same  if 
any  other  interval  had  been  employed  instead  of  that  of  24  hours, 
arbitrarily  chosen  for  measuring  the  after-effect  of  repetitions, 
or  whether  as  a  consequence  the  entire  rationale  of  the  results 
would  be  different,  just  as  the  absolute  values  are  necessarily 
different.  Naturally,  this  question  cannot  be  decided  a  priori. 

For  ascertaining  the  relation  of  dependence  between  the  in- 
crease in  the  number  of  repetitions  of  a  series  and  the  ever 
vjl       deeper  impression  of  it  which  results,  I  have  formulated  the 
jMK1;   problem  as  follows:    If  homogeneous  series  are  impressed  to 
'   A  different  extents  as  a  result  of  different  numbers  of  repetitions, 
and  then  24  hours  later  are  learned  to  the  point  of  the  first 
possible  reproduction  by  heart,  how  are  the  resulting  savings  in 
work  related  to  each  other  and  to  the  corresponding  number  of 
former  repetitions? 

Section  23.     The  Tests  and  their  Results 

In  order  to  answer  the  question  just  formulated,  I  have  car- 
ried out  70  double  tests,  each  of  six  series  of  16  syllables  each. 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  the  Number  of  Repetitions        55 

Each  double  test  consisted  in  this,  that  the  separate  series — each 
for  itself — were  first  read  attentively  a  given  number  of  times 
(after  frequently  repeated  readings  they  were  recited  by  heart 
instead  of  read),  and  that  24  hours  later  I  relearned  up  to  the 
point  of  first  possible  reproduction  the  series  thus  impressed 
and  then  in  part  forgotten.  The  first  reading  was  repeated  8, 
16,  24,  32,  42,  53,  or  64  times. 

An  increase  of  the  readings  used  for  the  first  learning  beyond 
64  repetitions  proved  impracticable,  at  least  for  six  series  of  this 
length.  For  with  this  number  each  test  requires  about  ^  of 
an  hour,  and  toward  the  end  of  this  time  exhaustion,  headache, 
aftd  other  symptoms  were  often  felt  which  would  have  com- 
plicated the  conditions  of  the  test  if  the  number  of  repetitions 
had  been  increased. 

The  tests  were  equally  divided  among  the  seven  numbers  of 
repetitions  investigated  so  that  to  each  of  them  were  allotted  10 
double  tests.  The  results  were  as  follows  for  the  six  series  of  a 
single  test  taken  together  and  without  subtraction  of  the  time 
used  for  reciting. 

After  a  preceding  study  of  the  series  by  means  of  "  x  "  repe- 
titions, they  were  learned  24  hours  later  with  an  expenditure  of 
"  y  "  seconds. 


x  =  8 

x  =  16 

x  =  24 

x  =  32 

x  =  42 

x  =  53 

x  =  64 

y= 

y= 

y= 

y= 

y— 

y= 

V  "  •  ~ 

1171 

998 

1013 

736 

708 

615 

530 

1070 

795 

853 

764 

579 

579 

483 

1204 

'  936 

v   854 

863 

734 

601 

499 

1180 

1124 

908 

850 

660 

561 

464 

1246 

1168 

1004 

892 

738 

618 

412 

1113 

1160 

1068 

868 

713 

582 

419 

1283 

1189 

979 

913 

649 

572 

417 

1141 

1186 

966 

858 

634 

516 

397 

1127 

1164 

1076 

914 

788 

550 

391 

1139 

1059 

1033 

975 

763 

660 

524 

m=   1167 

1078 

975 

863 

697 

585 

454 

P.E.m=±14  ±28    ±  17   ±  15    ±14   ±   9   ±  11 

The  preceding  table  of  numbers  gives  the  timej_ac£MJ[Z3LJ4££flf  ' 
in  learning  by  heart  the  series  studied  24  hours  previously.  Since 
we  are  interested  not  so  much  in  the  times  used  as  the  times 
saved,  we  must  know  how  long  it  would  have  taken  to  learn  by 
heart  the  same  series  if  no  previous  study  had  been  made.  In 
the  case  of  the  series  which  were  repeated  42,  53,  and  64  times, 


- 


556 


Memory 


this  time  can  be  learned  from  the  tests  themselves.  For,  in 
their  case,  the  number  of  repetitions  is  greater  than  the  average 
ninimum  for  the  first  possible  reproduction,  which  in  the  case 
i>f  the  i6-syllable  series  (p.  46)  amounted  to  31  repe- 
titions. In  their  case,  therefore,  the  point  can  be  determined 
at  which  the  first  errorless  reproduction  of  that  series  appeared 
as  the  number  of  repetitions  kept  on  increasing.  But  on  account 
of  the  continued  increase  in  the  number  of  repetitions  and  the 
resulting  extension  of  the  time  of  the  test,  the  conditions  were 
somewhat  different  from  those  in  the  customary  learning  of 
series  not  hitherto  studied.  In  the  case  of  the  series  to  which 
a  smaller  number  of  repetitions  than  the  above  were  given,  the 
numbers  necessary  for  comparison  cannot  be  derived  from  their 
own  records,  since,  as  a  part  jaf  the  plan  of  the  experiment,  they 
were  not  completely  learned  by  heart.  I  have  consequently  pre- 
ferred each  time  to  find  the  saving  of  work  in  question  by  com- 
parison with  the  time  required  for  learning  by  heart  not  the 
same  but  a  similar  series  up  to  that  time  unknown.  For  this 
I  possess  a  fairly  correct  numerical  value  from  the  time  of  the 
tests  in  question:  any  six  i6-syllable  series  was  learned,  as  an 
average  of  53  tests,  in  1,270  seconds,  with  the  small  probable 
error  ±  7. 

If  all  the  mean  values  are  brought  together  in  relation  to  this 
last  value,  the  following  table  results: 


I 

II 

III 

IV 

After  a  preceding 
study  of  the 

They  were  just 
memorized  24 

The  result  therefore 
of  the  preceding 

Or,  for  each  of 
the  repetitions,  an 

series  by  X 
repetitions, 

hours  later  in 
Y  seconds 

study  was  a  saving 
of  T  seconds, 

average  saving 
of  D  seconds 

X= 

Y« 

PIT1 
.-Ej.m  — 

T= 

P.E.m= 

D= 

7/  Sec* 

0 

1270 

7 

8 

1167 

14 

103 

16 

12.9 

10 

1078 

28 

192 

29 

12.0 

24 

975 

17 

295 

19 

12.3 

32^ 

863 

15 

407 

17 

12.7 

42 

697 

14 

573 

.   16 

13.6 

53 

585 

9 

685   3 

11 

12.9 

64 

454 

11 

816 

13 

12.8 

m=12.7 

Retention  as  a  Function  of  the  Number  of  Repeiitions       57 

The  simple  relation  approximately  realised  in  these  numbers 
is  evident :  the  number  of  repetitions  used  to  impress  the  series 
(Column  I)  and  the  saving  in  work  in  learning  the  series  24 
hours  later  as  a  result  of  such  impression  (Col.  III)Jincrease 
in  the  same  fashion.  Division  of  the  amount  of  work  saved  by 
trie"  corresponding  number  of  repetitions  gives  as  a  quotient  a 
practically  constant  value  (Col.  IV). 

Consequently  the  results  of  the  test  may  be  summarised  and 
formulated  as  follows:  When  nonsense  series  of  16  syllables  each 
were  impressed  in  memory  to  greater  and  greater  degrees  by 
means  of  attentive  repetitions,  the  inner  depth  of  impression 
in  part  resulting  from  the  number  of  the  repetitions  increased, 
within  certain  limits,  approximately  proportionally  to  that  num- 
ber. This  increase  in  depth  was  measured  by  the  greater  readi- 
ness with  which  these  series  were  brought  to  the  point  of  repro- 
duction after  24  hours.  The  limits  within  which  this  relation 
was  determined  were  on  the  one  side,  zero,  and,  on  the  other, 
about  double  the  number  of  repetitions  that  on  the  average 
just  sufficed  for  learning  the  series. 

For  six  series  taken  together  the  after-effect  of  each  repeti- 
tion— i.e.,  the  saving  it  brought  about — amounted  on  the  average 
to  12.7  seconds,  consequently  to  2.1  seconds  for  each  single 
series.  As  the  rejg^tijaQri  of  a  series  of  16  syllables  Jn_itself 
takes  from  6.6  to  6.8  seconds,  its  after-effect  24  hours  later 
amounts  to  a  scant  third  of  its  own  duration.  In  other  words: 
for  each  three  additional  repetitions  which  I  spent  on  a  given  day 
on  the  study  of  a  series,  I  saved,  in  learning  that  series  24  houri 
later,  on  the  average,  approximately  one  repetition;  and,  within 
the  limits  stated,  it  did  not  matter  how  many  repetitions  alto-,; 
gether  were  spent  on  the  memorisation  of  a  series. 

Whether  the  results  found  can  claim  any  more  general  impor- 
tance, or  whether  they  hold  good  only  for  the  single  time  of 
their  actual  occurrence,  and  even  then  give  a  false  im- 
pression of  a  regularity  not  otherwise  present,  I  cannot  now 
decide.  I  have  no  direct  control  tests.  Later,  however,  (chapter 
VIII,  §  34~)^where  results  obtained  in  reference  to  quite  a 
different  problem  agree  with  the  present  results,  I  can  bring  for- 
ward indirect  evidence  on  this  point.  I  am  therefore  inclined  to 


58  Memory 

ascribe  general  validity  to  these  results,  at  least  for  my  own 
case. 

NOTE. — There  is  in  the  tests  an  inner  inequality  which  I  can  neither 
avoid,  nor  remove  by  correction,  but  can  only  point  out.  It  is  that  a 
small  number  of  repetitions  of  the  series  requires  only  a  few  minutes,  and 
consequently  come  at  a  time  of  unusual  mental  vitality.  With  64  repeti- 
tions the  whole  work  takes  about  y$  of  an  hour ;  the  great  part  of  the  series 
is,  therefore,  studied  in»a  condition  of  diminished  vigor  or  even  of  a  certain 
exhaustion,  and  the  repetitions  will,  consequently,  be  less  effective.  It 
is  just  the  reverse  of  this  in  the  reproduction  of  the  series  the  next 
day.  The  series  impressed  by  8  perusals  require  three  times  as  much 
time  in  order  to  be  memorised  as  those  perused  64  times.  Consequently 
the  latter  will  be  learned  a  little  more  quickly  not  only  on  account  of 
their  greater  fixedness,  but  also  because  they  are  now  studied  for  the 
most  part  under  better  conditions.  These  irregularities  are  mutually 
opposed,  as  is  evident,  and  therefore  partially  compensate  each  other : 
the  series  prepared  under  comparatively  unfavorable  conditions  ire 
memorised  under  comparatively  more  favorable  conditions,  and  vice 
versa.  I  cannot  tell,  however,  how  far  this  compensation  goes  and 
how  far  any  remaining  inequality  of  conditions  disturbs  the  results. 

Section  24.    The  Influence  of  Recollection 

One  factor  in  the  regular  course  of  the  results  obtained  seems 
to  deserve  special  attention.  In  ordinary  life  it  is  of  the  greatest 
importance,  as  far  as  the  form  which  memory  assumes  is  con- 
cerned, whether  the  reproductions  occur  with  accompanying- 
recollection  or  not, — i.e.,  whether  the  recurring  ideas  simply 
return  or  whether  a  knowledge  of  their  former  existence  and  cir- 
cumstances comes  back  with  them.  For,  in  this  second  case,  they 
obtain  a  higher  and  special  value  for  our  practical  aims  and 
for  the  manifestations  of  higher  mental  life.  The  question  now 
is,  what  connection  is  there  between  the  inner  life  of  these  ideas 
and  the  complicated  phenomena  of  recollection  which  sometimes 
do  and  sometimes  do  not  accompany  the  appearance  in  con- 
sciousness of  images?  Our  results  contribute  somewhat  toward 
the  answer  to  this  question. 

When  the  series  were  repeated  8  or  16  times  they  had  become 
I  unfamiliar  to  me  by  the  next  day.  Of  course,  indirectly,  I  knew 
quite  well  that  they  must  be  the  same  as  the  ones  studied  the 
day  before,  but  I  knew  this  only  indirectly.  I  did  not  get  it  from 
the  series,  I  did  not  recognise  them.  But  with  53  or  64  repeti- 
tions I  soon,  if  not  immediately,  treated  them  as  old  acquaint- 
ances, I  remembered  them  distinctly.  Nothing  corresponding  to 
this  difference  is  evident  in  the  times  for  memorisation  and  for 
savings  of  work  respectively.  They  are  not  smaller  relatively 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  the  Number  of  Repetitions        59 

when  there  is  no  possibility  of  recollection  nor  larger  relatively 
when  recollection  is  sure  and  vivid.  The  regularity  of  the  after- 
effect of  many  repetitions  does  not  noticeably  deviate  from  the 
line  that  is,  so  to  speak,  marked  out  by  a  smaller  number  of  repe- 
titions although  the  occurrence  of  this  after-effect  is  accompanied 
by  recollection  in  the  first  case  just  as  indubitably  as  it  lacks  ' 
recollection  in  the  second  case. 

I  restrict  myself  to  pointing  out  this  noteworthy  fact.  Gen- 
eral conclusions  from  it  would  lack  foundation  as  long  as  the 
common  cause  cannot  be  proved. 


Section  25.    The  Effect  of  a  Decided  Increase  in  the  Number  of 

Repetitions 

It  would  be  of  interest  to  know  whether  the  approximate  pro- 
portionality between  the  number  of  repetitions  of  a  series  and  ', 
the  saving  of  the  work  in  relearning  the  latter  made  possible 
thereby,  which  in  my  own  case  seemed  to  take  place  within 
certain  limits,  continues  to  exist  beyond  those  limits.  If,  further- 
more, as  a  result  of  each  repetition  a  scant  third  of  its  own 
value  is  saved  up  to  be  applied  on  the  reproduction  24  hours 
later,  I  should  be  able  to  just  reproduce  spontaneously  after  24 
hours  a  series  of  16  syllables,  the  initial  syllable  being  given, 
provided  I  had  repeated  it  the  first  day  thrice  as  many  times 
as  were  absolutely  necessary  for  its  first  reproduction.  As  this 
requirement  is  31-32  repetitions  the  attainment  of  the  aim  in  ques- , 
tion  would  necessitate  about  100  repetitions.  On  the  supposi- 
tion of  the  general  validity  of  the  relation  found,  the  number  of 
repetitions  to  be  made  at  a  given  time,  in  order  that  errorless 
reproduction  might  take  place  24  hours  later,  could  be  calculated 
for  any  kind  of  series  for  which,  so  to  say,  the  "  after-effect- 
coefficient  "  of  the  repetitions  had  been  ascertained."" 

I  have  not  investigated  this  question  by  further  increasing  the 
number  of  repetitions  of  unfamiliar  16  syllable  series  because, 
as  has  been  already  noted,  with  any  great  extension  of  the  tests 
the  increasing  fatigue  and  a  certain  drowsiness  cause  complica- 
tions. However,  I  have  made  some  trial  tests  partly  with  shorter 
series,  and  partly  with  familiar  series,  all  of  which  confirmed 
the  result  that  the  proportion  in  question  gradually  ceases  to  hold 
with  a  further  increase  of  repetitions.  Measured  by  the  saving 


6o 


Memory 


of  work  after  24  hours  the  effect  of  the  later  repetitions  gradu- 
ally decreases. 

Series  of  12  syllables  (six  of  the  series  were  each  time 
combined  into  a  test)  were  studied  to  the  point  of  first  possible 
reproduction;  and  immediately  after  the  errorless  reproduction 
each  series  was  repeated  three  times  (in  all  four  times)  as  often 
as  the  memorisation  (exclusive  of  the  recital)  had  required. 
After  24  hours  the  same  series  were  relearned  to  the  first  possible 
reproduction.  Four  tests  furnished  the  following  results  (the 
numbers  indicate  the  repetitions)  : 


Repetitions 

Immediately 

Total 

After  24 

Thus  the  work 

for  the 

successive 

number  of 

hours  the 

saved  by  the 

learning  and 

repetitions 

repetitions 

memorization 

total  number 

recital  of 

for  the  sake  of 

used  for  the 

of  the  series 

of  repetitions 

6  series 

greater  surety 

6  series 

required 

amounted  to 

104 

294 

398 

41 

63 

101 

285 

386 

39 

62 

114 

324 

438 

46 

68 

109 

309 

.418 

38 

71 

m=     107 

303 

410 

41 

66 

P.E.m=1.4 

In  my  own  case — within  reasonable  limits — the  after-effect 
of  the  repetitions  of  series  of  12  syllables  after  24  hours  is  a 
little  smaller  than  is  the  case  with  16  syllables;  it  must  be 
estimated  as  at  least  three  tenths  of  the  sum  total  of  the  repe- 
titions. If  this  relation  were  approximately  to  continue  to  hold 
with  very  numerous  repetitions,  it  would  be  reasonable  to  expect 
that,  after  24  hours,  series  on  whose  impression  four  times  as 
many  repetitions  had  been  expended  as  were  necessary  for  their 
first  reproduction  could  be  recited  without  any  further  expendi- 
ture of  energy.  Instead  of  this,  in  the  cases  examined,  the  re- 
learning  required  about  35  per  cent  of  the  work  required  for 
the  first  recital.  The  effect  of  an  average  number  of  410  repe- 
titions was  a  saving  of  only  one  sixth  of  this  sum.  If  now 
the  first  repetitions  were  represented  by  about  three  tenths  of 
their  amount,  the  effect  of  the  later  repetitions  must  have  been 
very  slight. 

Investigations  of  the  following  kind,  which  I  do  not  here 
give  in  detail,  led  to  the  same  result.  Syllable  series  of  different 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  the  Number  of  Repetitions       61 

lengths  were  gradually  memorised  by  frequent  repetitions  which, 
however,  did  not  all  take  place  on  one  day,  but  were  distributed 
over  several  successive  days  (Chap.  VIII).    When,  after  several 
days,  only  a  few  repetitions  were  necessary  in  order  to  learn  the 
series  by  heart,  they  were  repeated  three  or  four  times  as  often 
as  was  necessary,  at  this  phase  of  memorisation,  for  the  first 
errorless  reproduction.     But  in  no  single  case  did  I  succee^m->v 
an  errorless  reproduction  of  the  series  after  24  hours  unless  / 
I  had  read  them  again  once  or  several  times.    The  influence  of 
the  frequent  repetitions  still  appeared,  indeed,  in  a  certain  saving 
of  work,  but  this  became  less  in  proportion  to  the  decreasing 
amount  of  work  to  be  saved.     It  was  very  hard,  by  means  of 
repetitions  which  had  taken  place  24  hours  previously,  to  elimin-  • 
ate  the  last  remnant  of  the  work  of  relearning  a  given  series. 

To  summarise:  The  effect  of  increasing  the  number  of  repe- 
titions of  series  of  syllables  on  their  inner  fixedness  in  the  above 
defined  sense  grew  at  first  approximately  in  proportion  to  the 
number  of  repetitions,  then  that  effect  decreased  gradually,  and 
finally  became  very  slight  when  the  series  were  so  deeply  im- 
pressed that  they  could  be  repeated  after  24  hours,  almost  spon- 
taneously. Since  this  decrease  must  be  considered  gradual  and 
continuous,  its  beginning  would,  in  more  accurate  investigations, 
probably  have  become  evident  even  within  the  limits  withhl  which 
we  found  a  proportionality,  whereas  now  it  is  hidden  on  account 
of  its  small  amount  and  the  wide  limits  of  error. 


CHAPTER  VII 

RETENTION  AND  OBLIVISCENCE  AS  A  FUNCTION 
OF  THE  TIME 

Section  26.     Explanations  of  Retention  and  Obliviscence 

All  sorts  of  ideas,  if  left  to  themselves,  are  gradually  for- 
gotten. This  fact  is  generally  known.  Groups  or  series  of 
ideas  which  at  first  we  could  easily  recollect  or  which  recurred 
frequently  of  their  own  accord  and  in  lively  colors,  gradually 
return  more  rarely  and  in  paler  colors,  and  can  be  reproduced 
by  voluntary  effort  only  with  difficulty  and  in  part.  After  a 
longer  period  even  this  fails,  except,  to  be  sure,  in  rare  instances. 
Names,  faces,  bits  of  knowledge  and  experience  that  had  seemed 
lost  for  years  suddenly  appear  before  the  mind,  especially  in 
dreams,  with  every  detail  present  and  in  great  vividness;  and 
it  is  hard  to  see  whence  they  came  and  how  they  managed  to 
keep  hidden  so  well  in  the  meantime.  Psychologists — each  in 
accordance  with  his  general  standpoint — interpret  these  facts 
from  different  points  of  view,  which  do  not  exclude  each  other 
entirely  but  still  do  not  quite  harmonise.  One  set,  it  seems,  lays 
most  importance  on  the  remarkable  recurrence  of  vivid  images 
even  after  long  periods.  They  suppose  that  of  the  perceptions 
caused  by  external  impressions  there  remain  pale  images, 
"  traces,"  which,  although  in  every  respect  weaker  and  more 
flighty  than  the  original  perceptions,  continue  to  exist  unchanged 
in  the  intensity  possessed  at  present.  These  mental  iniages  can- 
not  compete  with  the  much  more  intense  and  compact  percep- 
tions of  real  life;  but  where  the  latter  are  missing  entirely  or 
partly,  the  former  domineer  all  the  more  unrestrainedly.  It  is 
also  true  that  the  earlier  images  are  more  and  more  overlaid, 
so  to  speak,  and  covered  by  the  later  ones.  Therefore,  in  the 
case  of  the  earlier  images,  the  possibility  of  recurrence  offers 
itself  more  rarely  and  with  greater  difficulty.  But  if,  by  an 
accidental  and  favorable  grouping  of  circumstances,  the  accumu- 

62 


Retention  and  Obliviscence  as  a  Function  of  the  Time        63 

lated  layers  are  pushed  to  one  side,  then,  of  course,  that  which 
was  hidden  beneath  must  appear,  after  whatever  lapse  of  time, 
|  in  its  original  and  still  existent  vividness.1 

For  others2  the  ideas,  the  persisting  images,  suffer  changgs 
which  more  and  more  affect  thei?  nature ;  the  concept  of  obscura- 
tion comes  in  here.    Older  ideas  are  repressed  and  forced  to  sink  4 
down,  so  to  speak,  by  the  more  recent  ones.    As  time  passes  one 
of  these  general  qualities,  inner  clearness  and  intensity  of  con-/ 
sciousness,  suffers  damage.    Connections  of  ideas  and  series  of  j 
ideas  are  subject  to  the  same  process  of  progressive  weakening; 
it  is  furthered  by  a  resolution  of  the  ideas  into  their  components, 
as  a  result  of  which  the  now  but  loosely  connected  members  are 
eventually  united  in  new  combinations.     The  complete  disap- 
pearance of  the  more  and  more  repressed  ideas  occurs  only  j 
after  a  long  time.     But  one  should  not  imagine  the  repressed 
ideas  in  their  time  of  obscuration  to  be  pale  images,  but  rather 
to  be  tendencies,  "  dispositions,"  to  recreate  the  image  contents 
forced  to  sink  down.     If  these  dispositions  are  somehow  sup- 
ported and  strengthened,  it  may  happen  at  any  one  moment  that 

1  This  is  the  opinion  of  Aristotle  and  is  still  authoritative  for  many 
people.  Lately,  for  instance,  Delboeuf  has  taken  it  up  again,  and  has 
used  it  as  a  complement  to  his  "  theorie  generate  de  la  sensibilite."  In 
his  article,  Le  sommeil  et  les  reves  (Rev.  Philos.  IX,  p.  153  f.),  he  says: 
"  Nous  voyons  maintenant  que  tout  acte  de  sentiment,  de  pensee  ou  de 
volition  en  vertu  d'une  loi  universelle  imprime  en  nous  une  trace  plus 
ou  moins  profonde,  mais  indelebile,  generalement  gravee  sur  une  infinite 
de  traits  anterieurs,  surchargee  plus  tard  d'une  autre  infinite  de  linea- 
ments de  toute  nature,  mais  dont  1'ecriture  est  neanmoins  indefiniment 
susceptible  de  reparaitre  vive  et  nette  au  jour."  (We  see  now  that  by 
a  general  law  every  act  of  feeling,  thought  or  will  leaves  a  more  or  less 
deep  but  indelible  impress  upon  our  mind,  that  such  a  tracing  is  usually 
graven  upon  an  infinite  number  of  previous  traces  and  later  is  itself  over- 
laid with  innumerable  others  but  nevertheless  is  still  capable  of  vivid 
and  clear  reappearance.)  It  is  true  that  he  proceeds:  "neanmoins  .  .  . 
il  y  a  quelque  verite  dans  1'opinion  qui  veut  que  la  memoire  non  seulement 
se  fatigue  mais  s'oblitere"  (nevertheless  .  .  .  there  is  some  truth 
in  the  opinion  that  memory  not  only  becomes  fatigued  but  that  it  dis- 
appears"), but  he  explains  this  by  the  theory  that  one  memory  might 
hinder  another  from  appearing.  "  Si  un  souvenir  rre  chasse  pas  I'autre 
on  peut  du  moins  pretendre  qu'un  souvenir  empeche  1'autre  et  qu'ainsi 
pour  la  substance  cerebrale,  chez  1'individu,  il  y  a  un  maximum  de 
saturation."  (If  one  recollection  does  not  actually  drive  out  another, 
it  may  at  least  be  maintained  that  one  recollection  hinders  the  other  and 
that  thus  the  brain  of  each  individual  is  saturated.) 

The  curious  theory  of  Bain  and  others  that  each  idea  is  lodged  in 
a  separate  ganglion  cell,  an  hypothesis  impossible  both  psychologically 
and  physiologically,  is  also  rooted  to  a  certain  extent  in  Aristotle's  view. 

"Herbart  and  his  adherents.  See,  for  instance,  Waitz,  Lehrbuch  der 
Psychologic  Sect.  16. 


64  Memory 

the  repressing  and  hindering  ideas  become  depressed  themselves, 
and  that  the  apparently  forgotten  idea  arises  again  in  perfect 
clearness. 

A  third  view  holds  that,  at  least  in  the  case  of  complex  ideas, 
obliviscence  consists  in  the  crumbling  into  parts  and  the  loss  of 
separate  components  instead  of  in  general  obscuration.  The  idea 
of  resolution  into  component  parts  recently  spoken  of  supplies 
here  the  only  explanation.  "  The  image  of  a  complex  object  is 
dim  in  our  memory  not  because  as  a  whole  with  all  its  parts 
present  and  in  ordei/it  is  illuminated  by  a  feebler  light  of  con- 
sciousness, but  it  is  because  it  has  become  incomplete.  Some 
parts  of  it  are  entirely  lacking.  Above  all  the  precise  connection 
of  those  still  extant  is,  in  general,  missing  and  is  supplied  only  by 
the  thought  that  some  sort  of  union  once  existed  between  them ; 
the  largeness  of  the  sphere  in  which,  without  being  able  to 
make  a  final  decision,  we  think  this  or  that  connection  equally 
probable,  determines  the  degree  of  dimness  which  we  are  to 
ascribe  to  the  idea  in  question."1 

Each  of  these  opinions  receives  a  certain,  but  not  exclusive, 
support  from  the  actual  inner  experiences,  or  experiences  sup- 
posed to  be  actual,  which  we  at  times  have.  And  what  is  the 
reason?  It  is  that  these  fortuitous  and  easily  obtained  inner 
experiences  are  much  too  vague,  superficial  and  capable  of  various 
interpretations  to  admit  in  their  entirety  of  only  a  single  inter- 
pretation, or  even  to  let  it  appear  as  of  preponderating  proba- 
bility. Who  could,  with  even  tolerable  exactness,  describe  in  its 
gradual  course  the  supposed  overlaying  or  sinking  or  crumbling 
of  ideas?  Who  can  say  anything  satisfactory  about  the  inhibi- 
tions caused  by  series  of  ideas  of  different  extent,  or  about  the 
disintegration  that  a  firm  complex  of  any  kind  suffers  by  the 
use  of  its  components  in  new  connections?  Everybody  has  his 
private  "  explanation  "  of  these  processes,  but  the  actual  condi- 
/tions  which  are  to  be  explained  are,  after  all,  equally  unknown 
ifio  all  of  us. 

If  one  considers  the  limitation  to  direct,  unaided  observation 
and  to  the  chance  occurrence  of  useful  experiences,  there  seems 
but  little  prospect  or  improvement  in  conditions.  How  will 
one  for  example  determine  the  degree  of  obscuration  reached 
at  a  certain  point,  or  the  number  of  fragments  remaining?  Or 


'Lotze,  Metaphysik  (1870),  p.  521;  also  Mikrokosmos  (3)  I,  p.  231  ff. 


Retention  and  Obliviscence  as  a  Function  of  the  Time       65 

how  can  the  probable  course  of  inner  processes  be  traced  if 
the  almost  entirely  forgotten  ideas  return  no  more  to  con- 
sciousness ? 

Section  27.    Methods  of  Investigation  of  Actual  Conditions 

By  the  help  of  our  method  we  have  a  possibility  of  indirectly 
approaching  the  problem  just  stated  in  a  small  and  definitely 
limited  sphere,  and,  by  means  of  keeping  aloof  for  a  while  from 
any  theory,  perhaps  of  constructing  one. 

After  a  definite  time,  the  hidden  but  yet  existent  dispositions 
laid  down  by  the  learning  of  a  syllable-series  may  be  strengthened 
by  a  further  memorisation  of  the  series,  and  thereby  the  remain- 
ing fragments  may  be  united  again  to  a  whole.  The  work  neces- 
sary for  this  compared  with  that  necessary  when  such  disposi- 
tions and  fragments  are  absent  gives  a  measure  for  what  has 
been  lost  as  well  as  for  what  remains.  The  inhibitions  which 
idea-groups  of  different  sorts  or  extents  may  occasion  in  rela- 
tion to  others  must,  as  a  result  of  the  interposition  of  well  defined 
complexes  of  ideas  between  learning  and  relearning,  betray  itself  | 
in  the  more  or  less  increased  work  of  relearning.  The  loosening  \ 
of  a  bond  of  connection  by  some  other  use  of  its  components 
can  be  investigated  in  a  similar  manner  as  follows :  after  a  certain 
series  has  been  studied,  new  combinations  of  the  same  series 
are  memorised  and  the  change  in  the  amount  of  work  necessary 
for  relearning  the  original  combination  is  then  ascertained. 

First,  I  investigated  the  first  mentioned  of  these  relations  and 
put  the  question :  If  syllable  series  of  a  definite  kind  are  learned 
by  heart  and  then  left  to  themselves,  how  will  the  process  of 
forgetting  go  on  when  left  merely  to  the  influence  ofjime  or  the  . 
daijyjsyents  of  life  which  fill  it?  The  determination  of  the  losses 
suffered  was  made  in  the  way  described :  after  certain  intervals 
of  time,  the  series  memorised  were  relearned,  and  the  times 
necessary  in  both  cases  were  compared. 

The  investigations  in  question  fell  in  the  year  1879-80  and 
comprised  163  double  tests.  Each  double  test  consisted  in  learn-  ^ 
ing  eight  series  of  13  syllables  each  (with  the  exception  of  38 
double  tests  taken  from  11-12  A.  M.  which  contained  only  six 
ceries  each)  and  then  in  relearning  them  after  a  definite  time. 
The  learning  was  continued  untif  twd  errorless  recitations  of  the 
series  in  question  were  possible.^The  relearning  was  carried 
to  the  same  point;  it  occurred  at  one  of  the  following  seven 


66  Memory 

times, — namely,  after  about  one  third  of  an  hour,  after  i  hour, 
after  9  hours,  one  day,  two  days,  six  days,  or  31  days. 

The  times  were  measured  from  the  completion  of  the  first 
set  of  first  learnings,  as  a  consequence  of  which  no  great  accuracy 
was  required  in  case  of  the  longer  intervals.  The  influence  of 
the  last  four  intervals  was  tested  at  three  different  times  of 
day  (p.  33).  Some  preliminary  remarks  are  necessary  before 
the  results  obtained  can  be  communicated. 

Similar  experimental  conditions  may  be  taken  for  granted  in 
the  case  of  the  series  relearned  after  a  number  of  whole  days. 
At  any  rate  there  is  no  way  of  meeting  the  actual  fluctuations 
even  when  external  conditions  are  as  far  as  possible  similar,  other 
than  by  a  multiplication  of  the  tests.  Where  the  inner  dissimi- 
larity was  presumably  the  greatest,  namely  after  the  interval  of 
an  entire  month,  I  approximately  doubled  the  number  of  tests. 

In  the  case  of  an  interval  of  nine  hours  and  an  interval  of 
one  hour  between  learning  and  relearning,  there  existed,  how- 
\  ever,  a  noticeably  constant  difference  in  the  experimental  con-  > 
ditions.  -  In  the  later  hours  of  the  day  mental  vigor  and  receptivity; 
are  less.  The  series  learned  in  the  morning  and  then  relearned 
at  a  later  hour,  aside  from  other  influences,  require  more  work 
for  relearning  than  they  would  if  the  relearning  were  done  at 
a  time  of  mental  vigor  equal  to  that  of  the  original  learning. 
Therefore,  in  order  to  become  comparable,  the  numerical  values 
found  for  relearning  must  suffer  a  diminution  which,  at  least 
in  the  case  of  the  8  hour  interval,  is  so  considerable  that  it 
cannot  be  neglected.  It  must  be  ascertained  how  much  longer 
it  takes  to  learn  at  the  time  of  day,  B,  series  which  were  learned 
in  "  a  "  seconds  at  the  time  of  day,  A.  The  actual  determina- 
tion of  this  quantity  presupposes  more  tests  than  I,  up  to  the 
present,  possess.  If  a  necessary  but  inexact  correction  is  applied 
to  the  numbers  found  for  i  and  for  8  hours,  these  become  even 
more  unreliable  than  if  left  to  themselves. 

In  the  case  of  the  smallest  interval,  one  third  of  an  hour,  the 
same  drawback  reappears,  though  to  a  less  degree;  but  it  is 
probably  compensated  for  by  another  circumstance.  The  interval 
as  a  whole  is  so  short  that  the  relearning  of  the  first  series  of 
a  test  followed  almost  immediately  or  after  an  interval  of  one 
or  two  minutes  upon  the  learning  of  the  last  series  of  the  same 
test.  For  this  reason  the  whole  formed,  so  to  speak,  one  con- 


Retention  and  Obliviscence  as  a  Function  of  the  Time       67 

tinuous  test  in  which  the  relearning  of  the  series  took  place 
under  increasingly  unfavorable  conditions  as  regards  mental 
freshness.  But  on  the  other  hand  the  relearning  after  such  a  S 
short  interval  was  done  rather  quickly.  It  took  hardly  half  of 
the  time  required  for  the  learning.  By  this  means  the  interval 
between  the  learning  and  relearning  of  a  certain  series  became 
gradually  smaller.  The  later  series  therefore  had  more  favor- 
able conditions  with  regard  to  the  time  interval.  In  view  of 
the  difficulty  of  more  accurate  determinations,  I  have  taken  it 
for  granted  that  these  two  supposed  counteracting  influences 
approximately  compensated  each  other. 

Section  28.    Results 
In  the  following  table  I  denote  by: 

L  the  time  of  first  learning  of  the  series  in  seconds,  just  as  they 
were  found,  therefore  including  the  time  for  the  two  reci- 
tations. 

WL  the  time  for  relearning  the  series  also  including  the  recita- 
tions. 

WLk  the  time  of  relearning  reduced  where  necessary  by  a  cor- 
rection. 
J  the  difference  L — WL  or  L — WLk,  as  the  case  may  be — that 

is,  the  saving  of  work  in  the  case  of  relearning. 
Q  the  relation  of  this  saving  of  work  to  the  time  necessary  for 
the  first  learning,  given  as  a  per.  cent.     In  the  calculation 
of  this  quotient  I  considered  only  the  actual  learning  time, 
the  time  for  recitation  having  been  subtracted.1 
The  latter  was  estimated  as  being  85;  seconds  for  two  recita- 
tions of  8  series  of  13  syllables  each ;  that  would  correspond  to 

*A  theoretically  correct  determination  of  the  Probable  Errors  of 
the  differences  and  quotients  found  would  be  very  difficult  and  trouble- 
some. The  directly  observed  values  L  and  WL  would  have  to  be  made 
the  basis  of  it.  But  the  ordinary  rules  of  the  theory  of  errors  cannot 
be  applied  to  these  values,  because  these  rules  are  valid  only  for  obser- 
vations gained  independently  of  one  another,  whereas  L  and  WL  are 
inwardly  connected  because  they  were  obtained  from  the  same  series. 
The  source  of  error,  "  difficulty  of  the  series,"  does  not  vary  by  chance, 
but  in  the  same  way  for  each  pair  of  values.  Therefore  I  took  here 
the  learning  and  relearning  of  the  series  as  a  single  test  and  the 
resulting  A  or  Q,  as  the  case  may  be,  as  its  numerical  representative. 
From  the  independently  calculated  A  and  Q,  the  probable  errors  were 
then  calculated  just  as  from  directly  observed  values.  That  is  sufficient 
for  an  approximate  estimate  of  the  reliability  of  the  numbers. 


68 


Memory 


a  duration  of  0.41  seconds  for  each  syllable  (p.  31). 
Thus  Q  =  loo  A 

L— 85 
Finally  A,  B,  C  mean  the  previously  mentioned  times  of  day, 

10-11  A.  M.,   11-12  A.  M.,  6-8  P.  M. 
I.  19  minutes.     12  tests.     Learning  and  relearning  at  the  time  A. 


L 

WL 

A 

Q 

1156 

467 

689 

64.3 

1089 

528 

561 

55.9 

1022 

492 

530 

56.6 

1146 

483 

663 

62.5 

1115. 

490 

625 

60.7 

1066 

447 

619 

63.1 

985 

453 

532 

59.1 

1066 

517 

549 

56.0 

1364 

540 

824 

64.4 

975 

577 

398 

44.7 

1039 

528 

511 

53.6 

952 

452 

500 

57.7 

m=1081 

498 

583 

58.2 

P.E.m=l 

II.  63  minutes.  16  tests.  The  learning  at  the  time  A,  the  relearning 
at  the  time  B.  For  ascertaining  the  influence  of  this  difference  in  the  time 
of  day  I  have  the  following  data.  Six  series  qf  13  syllables  each  were  learned 
at  the  time  B  (not  including  the  timeof  recitation)  in  807seconds  (P.E.m=10) 
as  an  average  of  39  tests.  Just  as  many  series  of  the  same  kind  were  learned 
at  the  time  A  in  763  seconds  (P.E.m=7)  as  an  average  of  92  tests.  Thus  the 
values  found  in  the  later  period  are  about  5  per  cent,  of  their  own  amount 
too  large  as  compared  with  those  obtained  irf'the  earlier  period.  Therefore 
the  times  found  for  relearning  at  the  time  B  must  be  decreased  by  about 
5  per  cent,  to  make  them  comparable  with  those  of  learning. 


L 

WL 

WLk 

A 

Q 

1095 

625 

594 

501 

49.6 

1195 

821 

780 

415 

37.4 

1133 

669 

636 

497 

47.4 

1153 

687 

653 

500 

46.8 

1134 

626 

595 

539 

51.4 

1075 

620 

589 

486 

49.1 

1138 

704 

669 

469 

44.5 

1078 

565 

537 

541 

54.5 

1205 

770 

731 

474 

42.3 

1104 

723 

687 

417 

40.9 

886 

644 

612 

274 

34.2 

958 

591 

562 

396 

45.4 

1046 

739 

702 

344 

35.8 

1122 

790 

750 

372 

35.9 

1100 

609 

579 

521 

51.3 

1269 

709 

674 

595 

50.0 

m   1106 

681 

647 

459 

44.2 

Retention  and  Obliviscence  as  a  Function  of  the  Time        69 

III.  525  minutes.  12  tests.  The  learning  at  the  time  A,  the  relearnine 
at  the  time  C.  The  different  influence  of  the  two  times  of  day  is  calculated 
as  follows:  eight  series  of  13  syllables  each  required,  with  38  tests  at  time 
C,  1173  seconds  (P.E.m— 10);  similar  series  with  92  tests  at  time  A  required 
1027  seconds  (P.E.m=8).  The  first  number  is  approximately  12  per  cent, 
of  its  own  value  larger  than  the  second;  therefore  I  have  subtracted  that 
much  from  the  numerical  values  found  for  the  time  C. 


L 

WL 

WLk 

A 

Q 

1219 

921 

811 

408 

36.0 

975 

815 

717 

258 

29.0 

1015 

858 

755 

260 

28.0 

954 

784 

690 

264 

30.4 

1340 

955 

840 

500 

39.8 

1061 

811 

714 

347 

35.6 

1252 

784 

690 

562 

48.2 

1067 

860 

757 

310 

31.6 

1343 

1019 

897 

446 

35.5 

1181 

842 

741 

440 

40.1 

1080 

799 

703 

377 

37.9 

1091 

806 

709 

382 

38.0 

m  1132 

855 

752 

380 

35.8 

P.E.m=l 

IV.  One  day.    26  tests,  of  which  10  were  at  time  A,  8  at  time  B  (here  as 
everywhere  consisting  of  only  6  series  each),  8  at  time  C. 


L 

WL 

J 

Q 

1072 

811 

261 

26.4 

1369 

861 

508 

39.6 

1227 

823 

404 

35.4 

1263 

793 

470 

39.9 

1113 

754 

359 

34.9 

1000 

644 

356 

38.9 

1103 

628 

475 

46.7 

888 

754 

134 

16.7 

1030 

829 

201 

21.3 

1021 

660 

361 

38.6 

m  1109 

756 

353 

33.8 

P.E.m==2 

7o 


Memory 
B 


L 

WL 

A 

Q 

889 
824 
897 
825 
854 
863 
742 
907 

650 
537 
593 
599 
562 
761 
433 
653 

239 
287 
304 
226 
292 
122 
309 
254 

29.0 
37.8 
36.5 
29.7 
37.0 
14.9 
45.6 
30.1 

m   853 

599 

254 

32.6 
P.E.m=2.2 

L 

WL 

A 

Q 

1212 
1215 
1096 
1191 
1256 
1295 
1146 
1064 

935 
797 
647 
684 
898 
781 
936 
750 

277 
418 
449 
507 
358 
514 
210 
314 

24.6 
37.0 
44.4 
45.8 
30.6 
42.6 
19.8 
32.1 

TO  1184 

803 

381 

34.6 
P.E.m=2.3 

Retention  and  Obliviscence  as  a  Function  of  the  Time        7 1 


The  average  differences  between  times  of  learning  and  relearning  at  the 
different  times  of  day  vary  somewhat  with  regard  to  their  absolute  values. 
(Of  course  in  the  case  of  B  the  number  254  must,  first  be  multiplied  by  4/3, 
because  it  is  derived  from  only  6  series.)  But  the  relations  of  these  differ- 
ences to  the  times  of  first  learning  (the  Q's)  harmonize  sufficiently  well. 
If,  therefore,  all  theQ's  are  combined  in  a  general  average,  Q=33.7  (P.E.m=1.2). 

V.  Two  days.    26  tests;  11  of  these  at  the  time  A,  7  at  B,  8  at  C. 

A 


L 

WL 

A 

Q 

1066 

895 

171 

17.4 

1314 

912 

402 

32.7 

963 

855 

108 

12.3 

964 

710 

254 

28.9 

1242 

888 

354 

30.6 

1243 

710 

533 

46.0 

1144 

895 

249 

23.5 

1143 

874 

269 

25.4 

1149 

953 

196 

18.4 

1090 

855 

235 

23.4 

1376 

847 

529 

41.0 

m  1154 

854 

300 

27.2 

P.E.m=2.3 

B 


L 

WL 

A 

.   Q 

752 
1087 
1073 
826 
905 
811 
782 

549 
740 
620 
693 
548 
763 
618 

203 
347 
453 
133 
357 
48 
164 

29.5 
33.9 
44.9 
17.5 
42.4 
6.4 
22.8 

m   891 

647 

244 

28.2 
P.E.m=3.5 

Memory 
C 


L 

WL 

A 

Q 

1246 
1231 
1273 
1319 
1125 
1275 
1322 
1170 

889 
885 
1039 
925 
971 
891 
857 
880 

357 
346 
234 
394 
154 
384 
465 
290 

31.6 
30.2 
19.7 
31.9 
14.8 
32.3 
37.6 
26.7 

m  1245 

917 

328 

28.1 
P.E.m=1.8 

The  combination  of  the  three  average  values  of  Q,  which  are  stated  ia 
per  cents  and  lie  close  to  each  other,forthe  26  tests  gives  Q=27.8  (P.E.m=1.4) 

VI.  Six  days.    26  tests,  10  at  the  time  A,  8  at  B,  8  at  C. 

A 


L 

WL 

A 

Q 

1076 

868 

208 

21.0 

992 

710 

282 

31.1 

1082 

756 

326 

32.7 

1260 

973 

287 

24.4 

1032 

864 

168 

17.7 

1010 

955 

55 

5.9 

1197 

818 

379 

34.1 

1199 

828 

371 

33.3 

943 

697 

246 

28.7 

1105 

868 

237 

23.2 

m  1090 

834 

260 

25.2 

P.E.m=1.9 

Retention  and  Obliviscence  as  a  Function  of  the  Time 

B 


73 


L 

WL 

A 

-  Q 

902 
793 
848 
871 
1034 
745 
975 
805 

564 
517 
639 
709 
649 
728 
645 
766 

338 
276 
209 
162 
385 
17 
330 
39 

40.3 
37.9 
26.5 
20.1 
39.7 
2.5 
36.2 
5.3 

m   872 

652 

220 

26.1 
P.E.m=4 

L 

WL 

J 

Q 

1246 
1334 
1293 
1401 
1214 
1299 
1358 
1305 

922 
1097 
939 
988 
992 
1045 
1047 
881 

324 
237 
354 
413 
222 
254 
311 
424 

27.9 
19.0 
21.0 
31.4 
19.7 
20.9 
24.4 
34.8 

m  1306 

989 

317 

24.9 
P.E.m=1.6 

74 


Memory 


The  average  of  the  total  26  savings  of  work,  stated  in  per  cents,  is  25.4 
(P.E.m=1.3). 

VII.  31  days.    45  tests;  20  at  the  time  A,  15  at  B,  10  at  C. 

A 


L 

WL 

A 

Q 

1069 

813 

256 

26.0 

1109 

785 

324 

31.6 

1268 

858 

410 

34.7 

1280 

902 

378 

31.6 

1180 

848 

332 

30.3 

1095 

888 

207 

20.5 

1089 

988 

101 

10.1 

1113 

1043 

70 

6.8 

1090 

1025 

65 

6.5 

997 

876 

121 

13.3 

1116 

934 

182 

17.7 

1060 

893 

167 

17.1 

930 

796 

134 

15.9 

1030 

769 

261 

27.6 

980 

862 

118 

13.2 

1079 

805 

274 

27.6 

1254 

978 

276 

23.6 

1164 

938 

226 

20.9 

1127 

869 

258 

24.8 

1268 

972 

296 

25.0 

m  1115 

892 

223 

21.2 

P.E.m=1.3 

B 


L 

WL 

A 

Q 

831 

638 

193 

25.2 

867 

516 

351 

43.7 

960 

748 

212 

23.7 

828 

675 

153 

20.0 

859 

705 

154 

19.4 

838 

661 

177 

22.9 

946 

887 

59 

6.7 

833 

780 

53 

6.9 

696 

532 

164 

25.9 

757 

626 

131 

18.9 

906 

733 

173 

20.5 

1024 

915 

109 

11.4 

930 

780 

150 

17.3 

899 

756 

143 

17.1 

1018 

705 

313 

32.8 

m   879 

710 

169 

20.8 

P.E.m=1.4 

Retention  and  Obliviscence  as  a  Function  of  the  Time       7  5 

C 


L 

WL 

A 

Q 

1424 

1004 

420 

31.4 

1307 

1102 

205 

16.4 

1351 

893 

458 

36.2 

1245 

1090 

155 

13.4 

1258 

895 

363 

31.0 

1155 

1070 

85 

7.9 

1219 

800 

419 

36.9 

1278 

1110 

168 

14.1 

1120 

1051 

69 

6.7 

1250 

1055 

195 

16.7 

m   1261 

1007 

254 

21.1 

P.E.m=2.7 

The  average  of  45  savings  of  work  expressed  in  per  cents— 21.1  (P.E.m=0.8). 

A  hasty  glance  at  the  figures  above  reveals  the  fact  that  for 
each  interval  of  time  the  savings  in  work  which  become  evident 
when  the  series  is  relearned  have  very  fluctuating  values.  (This 
saving  in  work  is  each  time  the  measure  for  the  amount  re- 
membered at  the  end  of  the  interval.)  This  is  especially  the 
case  with  their  absolute  values  (A),  but  is  also  the  case  with 
the  relative  values  (Q).  The  results  are  taken  from  the  earlier 
period  and  suffer  from  several  disturbing  influences  to  which 
my  attention  was  first  drawn  by  the  tests  themselves. 

In  spite  of  all  irregularities  in  detail,  however,  they  group 
themselves  as  a  whole  with  satisfactory  certainty  into  an  har- 
monious picture.  As  a  proof  of  this  the  absolute  amount  of 
the  saving  in  work  is  of  less  value.  The  latter  evidently  depends 
upon  the  time  of  day — i.e.,  upon  the  changes  in  the  time  of  the 
first  learning  dependent  upon  it.  When  this  change  is  greatest 
(time  C),  A  also  is  greatest;  for  the  time  B,  they  are  in  ft  of 
the  cases  larger  than  for  the  time  A  (after  multiplying  by  4/3). 
On  the  other  hand,  the  values  (Q)  found  for  the  relation  of  each 
saving  of  work  to  the  time  originally  spent,  are  apparently  almost 
independent  of  this  ratio.  Their  averages  are  close  together  for 
all  three  times  of  day,  and  do  not  show  any  character  of  increase 
or  decrease  in  the  later  hours.  Accordingly  I  here  tabulate  the 
latter. 


76 


Memory 


I 

II 

III 

IV 

So  much  of  the  series 

learned  was  retained  that 

The  amount  forgotten 

No. 

After  X 
hours 

in  relearning  a  saving  of 
Q  %  of  the  time  of  original 
learning  was  made 

P.E.m 

was  thus  equivalent  to 
v  %  of  the  original  in 
terms  of  time  of  learning 

X= 

Q= 

v= 

1 

0.33 

58.2 

1 

41.8 

2 

1. 

44.2 

1 

55.8 

3 

8.8 

35.8 

1 

64.2 

4 

24. 

33.7' 

1.2 

66.31 

5 

48. 

27.8 

1.4 

72.21 

6 

6x24 

25.4 

1.3 

74.6 

7 

31x24 

21.1 

0.8 

78.9 

Section  29.    Discussion  of  Results 

1.  It  will  probably  be  claimed  that  the  fact  that  forgetting 
would  be  very  rapid  at  the  beginning  of  the  process  and  very 
slow  at  the  end  should  have  been  foreseen.    However,  it  would 
be  just  as  reasonable  to  be  surprised  at  this  initial  rapidity  and 
later  slowness  as  they  come  to  light  here  under  the  definite  con- 
ditions of  our  experiment  for  a  certain  individual,  and  for  a 
series  of  13  syllables.    One  hour  after  the  end  of  the  learning, 
the  forgetting  had  already  progressed  so  far  that  one  half  the 
amount  of  the  original  work  had  to  be  expended  before  the 
series  could  be  reproduced  again ;  after  8  hours  the  work  to  be 
made  up  amounted  to  two  thirds  of  the  first  effort.    Gradually, 
however,  the  process  became  slower  so  that  even  for  rather  long 
periods  the  additional  loss  could  be  ascertained  only  with  diffi- 
culty.   After  24  hours  about  one  third  was  always  remembered ; 
after  6  days  about  one  fourth,  and  after  a  whole  month  fully 
one  fifth  of  the  first  work  persisted  in  effect.    The  decrease  of 
this  after-effect  in  the  latter  intervals  of  time  is  evidently  so 
slow  that  it  is  easy  to  predict  that  a  complete  vanishing  of  the 
effect  of  the  first  memorisation  of  these  series  would,  if  they 
had  been  left  to  themselves,  have  occurred  only  after  an  indefin- 
itely long  period  of  time. 

2.  Least  satisfactory  in  the  results  is  the  difference  between 
the  third  and  fourth  values,  especially  when  taken  in  connection 
with  the  greater  difference  between  the  fourth  and  fifth  numbers. 
In  the  period  9-24  hours  the  decrease  of  the  after-effect  would 


Retention  and  Obliviscence  as  a  Function  of  tlie  Time       7  7 

accordingly  have  been  2^  per  cent.    In  the  period  24  to  48  hours 
it  would  have  been  6.1  per  cent;  in  the  later  24  hours,  then,  about 
three  times  as  much  as  in  the  earlier  15.    Such  a  condition  is 
not  credible,  since  in  the  case  of  all  the  other  numbers  the 
decrease  in  the  after-effect  is  greatly  retarded  by  an  increase  in  ! 
time.     It  does  not  become  credible  even  under  the  plausible  ; 
assumption  that  night  and  sleep,  which  form  a  greater  part  of 
the  15  hours  but  a  smaller  part  of  the  24,  retard  considerably 
the  decrease  in  the  after-effect. 

Therefore  it  must  be  assumed  that  one  of  these  three  values  is  -  i 
greatly  affected  by  accidental  influences.  It  would  fit  in  well 
with  the  other  observations  to  consider  the  number  33.7  per  cent 
for  the  relearning  after  24  hours  as  somewhat  too  large  and  to 
suppose  that  with  a  more  accurate  repetition  of  the  tests  it  would 
be  i  to  2  units  smaller.  However,  it  is  upheld  by  observations 
to  be  stated  presently,  so  that  I  am  in  doubt  about  it. 

3.  Considering  the  special,  individual,  and  uncertain  character 
of  our  numerical  results  no  one  will  desire  at  once  to  know 
what  "  law  "  is  revealed  in  them.  However,  it  is  noteworthy 
that  all  the  seven  values  which  cover  intervals  of  one  third  of 
an  hour  in  length  to  31  days  in  length  (thus  from  singlefold  to 
2,ooofold)  may  with  tolerable  approximation  be  put  into  a  rather 
simple  mathematical  formula.  I  call: 

t  the  time  in  minutes  counting  from  one  minute  before  the 
_end  of  the  learning, 

~~  FtKe  saving  of  work  evident  in  relearning,  the  equivalent  of 
the  amount  remembered  from  the  first  learning  expressed  in  per- 
centage of  the  time  necessary  for  this  first  learning, 

c  and  k  two  constants  to  be  defined  presently 

Then  the  following  formula  may  be  written: 

100  k 


By  using  common  logarithms  and  with  merely  approximate 
estimates,  not  involving  exact  calculation  by  the  method  of  least 
squares, 

£=1.84 


7  8  Memory 

Then  the  results  are  as  follows: 


t 

6 
Observed 

b 
Calculated 

A 

20 

58.2 

57.0 

+  1.2 

64 

44.2 

46.7 

—  2.5 

526 

35.8 

34.5 

+  1.3 

1440 

33.7 

30.4 

+  3.3 

2  x  1440 

27.8 

28.1 

-  0.3 

6  x  1440 

25:4 

24.9 

+  0.5 

31  x  1440 

21.1 

21.2 

—  0.1 

I 


The  deviations  of  the  calculated  values  from  the  observed 
values  surpass  the  probable  limits  of  error  only  at  the  second 
and  fourth  values.  With  regard  to  the  latter  I  have  already 
expressed  the  conjecture  that  the  test  might  have  given  here  too 
large  a  value  ;  the  second  suffers  from  an  uncertainty  concerning 
the  correction  made.  By  the  determination  made  for  t,  the 
formula  has  the  advantage  that  it  is  valid  for  the  moment  in 
which  the  learning  ceases  and  that  it  gives  correctly  b  =?  100. 
In  the  moment  when  the  series  can  just  be  recited,  the  relearning, 
of  course,  requires  no  time,  so  that  the  saving  is  equal  to  the 
work  expended. 

Solving  the  formula  for  k  we  have 


k  =  - 
100  —  b 

This  expression,  100  —  b  the  complement  of  the  work  saved,  is 
nothing  other  than  the  work  required  for  relearning,  the  equiva- 
lent of  the  amount  forgotten  from  the  first  learning.  Calling  this, 
v,  the  following  simple  relation  results  : 

b  k 


v         (log/)0 

To  express  it  in  words:  when  nonsense  series  of  13  syllables 
each  were  memorised  and  relearned  after  different  intervals,  the 
quotients  of  the  work  saved  and  the  work  required  were  about 
inversely  proportional  to  a  small  power  of  the  logarithm  of  those 
intervals  of  time.  To  express  it  more  briefly  and  less  accurately : 
the  quotients  of  the  amounts  retained  and  the  amounts  forgotten 
were  inversely  as  the  logarithms  of  the  times. 


Retention  and  Obliviscence  as  a  Function  of  the  Time        79 


Of  course  this  statement  and  the  formula  upon  which  it  rests 
have  here  no  other  value  than  that  of  a  shorthand  statement  of 
the  above  results  which  have  been  found  but  once  and  under 
the  circumstances  described.  Whether  they  possess  a  more  gen- 
eral significance  so  that ,  under  other  circumstances  or  with  other 
individuals,  they  might  find  expression  in  other  constants  I  can- 
not at  the  present  time  say. 

Section  jo.    Control  Tests 

At  any  rate,  even  though  only  for  my  own  case,  I  can  to  a 
certain  extent  give  support  to  two  of  the  values  mentioned  by 
tests  which  were  made  at  other  periods. 

From  a  period  even  further  back  than  that  of  the  investigations 
above  mentioned  I  possess  several  tests  with  series  of  ten  syllables, 
fifteen  series  composing  one  test.  The  series  were  first  memorised 
and  then,  at  an  average  of  18  minutes  after  the  first  learning, 
each  series  was  relearned.  Six  tests  had  the  following  results : — 


L 

LW 

A 

Q* 

848 

436 

412 

57.5 

963 

535 

428 

50.9 

921 

454 

467 

58.5 

879 

444 

435 

57.5 

912 

443 

469 

59.4 

821 

461 

360 

51.6 

m  =  891 

462 

429 

56.0 

*  The  time  subtracted  from  the  L  when  calculating  the  Q  for  two  repro- 
ductions of  15  series  is  123  seconds. 

When  relearning  series  of  ten  syllables  each,  18  minutes  after 
the  first  memorisation,  56  per  cent  of  the  work  originally  ex- 
pended was  therefore  saved.  The  number  agrees  satisfactorily 
with  the  one  found  above  (p.  68)  for  the  relearning  of 
series  of  syllables  of  13  syllables  each  after  19  minutes,  58  per 
cent.  Also  the  fact  that  the  latter,  notwithstanding  the  longer 
interval,  is  still  a  little  greater,  harmonises  completely,  as  will 
be  seen,  with  the  results  of  the  next  chapter.  According  to  them, 
shorter  series,  when  memorised,  are  forgotten  a  little  more  quickly 
than  longer  ones. 


8o 


Memory 


From  the  period  of  1883-84,  I  have  seven  tests,  consisting  of 
nine  series  of  12  syllables  each  that  were  relearned  24  hours  after 
the  first  memorisation.  The  following  results  were  obtained : 


L 

LW 

A 

Q 

791 
750 
911 
725 

783 
879 
689 

508 
522 
533 
494 
593 
585 
535 

283 
228 
378 
231 
190 
294 
154 

37.9 
32.3 
43.6 
33.9 
27.1 
35.2 
23.9 

m   790 

539 

251 

33.4 
P.E.m=1.7 

The  after-effect _of,the  first  memorisation  still  noticeable  after 
24  hours,  was  here  equivalent  to  a  saving  ofjwork  of  33.4  per  cent 
of  the  first  expenditure.  This  number  also  agrees  satisfactorily 
with  the  one  communicated  above  for  the  relearning  of  series 
of  13  syllables  each  after  24  hours  (33.7  per  cent),  although 
these  two  were  obtained  at  far  separated  time-periods  and  in  the 
course  of  widely  different  investigations. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

RETENTION  AS  A  FUNCTION  OF  REPEATED 
LEARNING 

Section  31.    Statement  of  the  Problem  and  the  Investigation 

Series  of  syllables  which  have  been  learned  by  heart,  forgotten, 
and  learned  anew  must  be  similar  as  to  their  inner  conditions 
at  the  times  when  they  can  be  recited.  The  energy  of  the  idea- 
tional  activity  which  is  directed  upon  them  and  which  serves  to 
establish  them  is  in  both  cases  so  far  heightened  that  quite  similar 
combinations  of  movements  occur  in  connection  with  them.  For  -f- 
the  period  after  the  recital  this  inner  similarity  ceases.  The  series 
are  gradually  forgotten,  but — as  is  sufficiently  well  known — the 
series  which  have  been  learned  twice  fade  away  much  more 
slowlyxthan  those  which  have  been  learned  but  once.  If  the  re- 
learning  is  performed  a  second,  a  third  or  a  greater  number  of 
times,  the  series  are  more  deeply  engraved  and  fade  out  less 
easily  and  finally,  as  one  would  anticipate,  they  become  pos- 
sessions of  the  soul  as  constantly  available  as  other  image-series 
which  may  be  meaningful  and  useful. 

I  have  attempted  to  obtain  numerical  data  on  the  relation  of 
dependence  which  exists  between  the  permanence  of  retention 
of  a  series  and  the  number  of  times  it  has  been  brought,  by 
means  of  renewed  learning,  to  a  just  possible  reproduction.  The 
relation  is  quite  similar  to  that  described  in  Chapter  VI  as  exist- 
ing between  the  surety  of  the  series  and  the  number  of  its  repe- 
titions. In  the  present  case,  however,  the  repetitions  do  not  take 
place  all  at  once,  but  at  separate  times  and  in  ever  decreasing 
frequency.  On  account  of  our  limited  insight  into  the  inner 
connection  of  these  processes  we  would  not  be  justified  in  ventur- 
ing an  assertion  about  one  relation  on  the  basis  of  the  other. 

Only  one  value  of  the  time  interval  between  the  separate  re- 
learnings  was  chosen,  namely,  24  hours.  Instead  of  changing 
intervals,  series  of  different  lengths  were  chosen  for  the  investi- 

ff 


82 


Memory 


gation,  the  lengths  being  12,  24  and  36  syllables.  A  single  test 
consisted  of  nine  series  of  the  first  length,  or  three  of  the  second, 
or  two  of  the  third.  In  addition  to  this  I  carried  out  several 
tests  with  six  stanzas  of  Byron's  "  Don  Juan." 

The  plan  of  the  experiment  was,  then,  as  follows :  The  required 
number  of  series  was  first  learned  and  then,  at  the  same  hour 
on  successive  days,  it  was  relearned  to  the  point  of  first  possible 
reproduction.  In  the  case  of  the  series  of  syllables,  the  number 
of  days  was  six ;  in  the  case  of  Byron's  stanzas,  it  was  only  four. 
Thus,  on  the  fifth  day,  the  stanzas  were  correctly  repeated 
without  any  preliminary  reproduction  and  the  problem,  accord- 
ingly, no  longer  existed.  For  each  kind  of  series,  seven  trials 
were  employed.  The  total  number  of  separate  tests  was,  in  con- 
sequence, 154,  a  number  of  which  required  only  a  few  minutes 
for  their  execution. 

The  entries  of  the  following  tables  indicate  the  repetitions 
which  were  necessary  in  order  to  bring  the  series  concerned  to 
the  first  possible  reproduction  (including  this)  ;  the  Roman  fig- 
ures designate  the  successive  days. 

1.  Nine  series  of  12  syllables  each. 


I 

II 

III 

IV 

V 

VI 

158 
151 
175 
149 
163 
173 
138 

102 
107 
105 
102 
124 
117 
106 

71 
74 

84 
72 
69 
86 
71 

50 
42 
60 
54 
61 
64 
59 

38 
34 
36 
35 
35 
42 
37 

30 
30 
33 
28 
31 
37 
30 

m  158 
P.E.m  3.4 

109 
2 

75 
1.7 

56 
2 

37 

0.7 

31 
0.7 

2.  Three  series  of  24  syllables  each. 


I 

II 

III 

IV 

V 

VI 

122 
127 
154 
139 
133 
142 
124 

73 
73 
78 
61 
73 
66 
70 

45 
40 
47 
33 
36 
42 
36 

29 
25 
27 
17 
26 
26 
24 

21 
18 
18 
12 
18 
17 
16 

16 
15 
12 
10 
14 
14 
14 

m   134 
P.E.m  2.9 

71 

1.4 

40 
1.3 

25 
1 

17 
0.7 

14 
0.5 

Retention  as  a  Function  of  Repeated  Learning 
3.  Two  series  of  36  syllables  each. 


I 

II 

III 

IV 

V 

VI 

115 
124 
137 
109 
87 
105 
110 

52 
59 
55 
48 
39 
40 
41 

23 
33 
26 
21 
21 
22 
21 

18 
21 
17 
16 
15 
17 
16 

9 
12 
12 
10 
13 
12 
10 

8 
10 
8 
10 
8 
10 
11 

m  112 
P.E.m  4 

48 
2 

24 
1.1 

17 
0.5 

11 
0.4 

9 
0.3 

4.  Six  stanzas  of  Byron's  "Don  Juan"  (Canto  X). 


I 

II 

III 

IV 

53 
56 
53 
49 
53 
53 
50 

29 
29 
30 
25 
27 
34 
28 

18 
16 
15 
14 
16 
21 
17 

11 
10 
10 
9 
10 
9 
10 

m  52 
P.E.mO.6 

29 
0.7 

17 
0.6 

10 
0.2 

In  order  to  bring  out  more  clearly  the  separate  relations  which 
exist  between  the  resulting  averages,  it  is  necessary  to  reduce 
the  total  figures  to  the  same  unit — i.e.,  to  divide  them  in  each  case 
by  the  number  of  series  constituting  a  single  trial.  If  this  is 
done  and  the  repetition  necessary  for  the  recital  is  deducted,  the 
following  table  results,  fractions  being  given  to  the  nearest  half 
or  quarter. 


Number  of 
syllables  in 


Number  of  repetitions  which,  on  the  average,  were 
necessary  for  the  bare  learning  of  the  series  on  suc- 
cessive days 


one  series 

I 

II 

III 

IV 

V 

VI 

12 

16.5 

11. 

7.5 

5. 

3. 

2.5 

24 

44. 

22.5 

12.5 

7.5 

4.5 

3.5 

36 

55. 

23. 

11. 

7.5 

4.5 

3.5 

1  stanza  D.  J. 

7.75 

3.75 

1.75 

0.5 

(0). 

(0). 

From  several  points  of  view  these  numbers  require  further 
consideration. 

,  4 


Memory 


Section  32.    Influence  of  the  Length  of  the  Series 

If  the  results  for  the  first  and  second  days  are  examined,  wel- 
come, though  not  surprising,  supplementary  data  on  the  relation 
of  dependence  presented  in  Chapter  V  is  obtained.  In  the 
former  chapter,  it  was  shown  that,  as  the  length  of  the  series 
increased,  the  number  of  repetitions  requisite  increased  very 
rapidly.  Here,  the  result  is  that  the  effect  of  this  need  of  more 
numerous  repetitions  in  the  cases  investigated  consists  not  merely 
in  making  the  series  just  reproducible,  but  also  in  the  firmer 
establishment  of  the  longer  series.  After  an  interval  of  24  hours 
they  could  be  relearned  to  the  point  of  being  just  reproducible 
with  a  saving  both  absolutely  and  relatively  greater  than  with  the 
shorter  series. 

The  following  table  makes  this  relation  clear. 


Number  of 
syllables  in 
one  series 

Number  of 
repetitions 
for  learning 

Saving  in  repeti- 
tions in  relearning 
after  24  hours 

Saving  in  %  of 
requirement  for 
first  learning 

12 
24 
36 

16.5 
44 
55 

5.5 
21.5 
32 

33.3 
48.9 
58.2 

The  saving  in  the  case  of  the  shortest  of  the  series  investigated 
is  one  third  for  the  second  learning  as  compared  with  the  first ; 
while  with  the  longest  series,  it  is  six  tenths.  It  can  be  said, 
therefore,  that  by  being  learned  to  the  first  possible  .reproduction 
the  series  of  36  syllables  is  approximately  twice  as  firmly  estab- 
lished as  the  series  of  12  syllables. 

In  this  there  is  nothing  new.  On  the  basis  of  the  familiar 
experience  that  that  which  is  learned  with  difficulty  is  better 
retained,  it  would  have  been  safe  to  prophesy  such  an  effect 
from  the  greater  number  of  repetitions.  That  which  probably 
would  not  have  been  anticipated  and  which  also  demands  atten- 
tion, is  the  more  definite  determination  of  this  general  relation. 
So  far  as  the  numbers  go,  they  seem  to  show  that,  between  the 
increase  of  the  repetitions  necessary  for  the  first  learning  and 
the  inner  stability  of  the  series  effected  by  them,  there  is  no 
proportionality.  Neither  the  absolute  nor  the  relative  saving  of 
work  advances  in  the  same  way  as  the  number  of  repetitions; 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Repeated  Learning  85 

•—> 

the  former  advance  much  faster  and  the  latter  noticeably  more  j 
slowly.  It  cannot,  therefore,  be  said  in  any  exact  sense  of  the; 
words  that  the  more  frequently  a  series  needs  to  be  repeatedi 
to-day  in  order  to  be  learned  by  heart  the  more  repetitions  will 
be  saved  in  its  reproduction  after  24  hours.  The  relation  in 
force  seems  to  be  much  more  complicated  and  its  exact  deter- 
mination would  require  more  extensive  investigations. 

The  relation  of  repetitions  for  learning  and  for  repeating 
English  stanzas  needs  no  amplification.  These  were  learned  by 
heart  on  the  first  day  with  less  than  half  of  the  repetitions  neces- 
sary for  the  shortest  of  the  syllable  series.  They  acquired  , 
thereby  so  great  stability  that  for  their  reproduction  on  the  next 
day  proportionally  no  more  work  was  needed  than  for  the  series 
of  24  syllables — i.e.,  about  half  of  the  first  expenditure. 

Section  33.     Influence  of  Repeated  Learning 

We  will  now  take  into  consideration  the  results  for  the  suc- 
cessive days  taken  as  a  whole.    On  each  day  the  average  number 
of  repetitions  necessary  for  the  committing  of  a  given  series 
is  less  than  on  the  preceding  day.     With  the  longer  series,  in 
whose  case  the  first  output  of  energy  is  great,  the  decrease  in    j 
the  amount  of  work  each  time  necessary  to  reach  the  first  pos-   j 
sible  reproduction  is  proportionally   rapid.     With  the  shorter 
series,  where  the  first  output  is  small,  the  decrease  is  propoM 
tionally  slow.    On  this  account  the  numbers  of  repetitions  neces- 
sary for  the  different  series  approach  each  other  more  and  more. 
With  the  series  of  24  and  36  syllables  this  is  apparent  even  from 
the  second  day ;  from  the  fourth  day  on,  the  numbers  ^all  abso- 
lutely together.    And  by  the  fifth  day  they  have  approached  very 
closely  to  the  number  of  repetitions  still  necessary,  in  accordance '/ 
with  the  slower  decrease,   for  the  learning  of  the  12-syllable 
series. 

A  simple  conformity  to  law  cannot  be  discovered  in  this 
successively  decreasing  necessity  for  work.  The  quotients  of 
the  necessary  repetitions  on  two  successive  days  approach  unity. 
If  the  final  repetition  were  not  subtracted,  as  was  done  in  the 
concluding  table  of  Section  31,  but  were  reckoned  in,  this  ap- 
proach would  be  somewhat  faster.  (In  the  case  of  the  English 
stanzas  it  generally  takes  place  only  under  these  conditions.) 


86 


Memory 


Nevertheless  the  course  of  the  numbers  cannot  be  described  by 
a  simple  formula. 

Rather  is  this  the  case  if  one  takes  into  consideration,  not 
the  gradually  decreasing  necessity  for  work,  but  the  just  as 
gradually  decreasing  saving  of  work. 


Number  of  repetitions  saved  on  learning  a  series  on 

Number  of 

the  following  day;  average  values 

No. 

syllables 

in  one  series 

I-II 

II-III 

III-IV 

IV-V 

V-VI 

1 

12 

5.5 

3.5 

2.5 

2 

0.5 

2 

24 

21.5 

10.0 

5.0 

3 

1.0 

3 

36 

32.0 

12.0 

3.5 

3 

1.0 

4 

1  stanza  D.  J. 

4.0 

2.0 

1.25 

0.5 

Of  these  numerical  sequences  two — namely,  the  second  and 
fourth  rows — form  with  great  approximation  a  decreasing 
geometrical  progression  with  the  exponent  0.5.  Very  slight 
changes  in  the  numbers  would  be  sufficient  fully  to  bring  out 
this  conformity.  By  slight  changes,  the  first  row  might  also 
be  transformed  into  a  geometrical  progression  with  the  exponent 
0.6.  On  the  contrary,  a  large  error  in  the  results  of  investiga- 
tion would  need  to  be  assumed  in  order  to  get  out  of  Row  3 
any  such  geometric  progression  (whose  exponent  would  then  be 
about  one  third). 

If  not  for  all,  yet  for  most,  of  the  results  found,  the  rela- 
tion can  be  formulated  as  follows:  If  series  ,of  nonsense 
syllables  or  verses  of  a  poem  are  on  several  successive  days 
each  time  learned  by  heart  to  the  point  of  the  first  possible 
reproduction,  the  successive  differences  in  the  repetitions  neces- 
\  sary  for  this  form  approximately  a  decreasing  geometrical  pro- 
• gression.  In  the  case  of  syllable-series  of  different  lengths,  the 
exponents  of  these  progressions  were  smaller  for  the  longer 
series  and  larger  for  the  shorter  ones. 

Although  the  tests  just  described  were  individually  not  more 
protracted  than  the  others,  yet  relatively  they  required  many 
days,  and  the  average  values  were  consequently  derived  from 
a  rather  small  number  of  observations.  So  here,  even  more 
than  elsewhere,  I  am  unable  to  affirm  that  the  simple  conformity 
to  law  approximately  realised  in  the  results  so  far  obtained  would 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Repeated  Learning  87 

stand  the  test  of  repetition  or  wider  extension  of  research.     I 
content  myself  by  calling  attention  to  it  without  emphasis. 

Section  34.    Influence  of  the  Separate  Repetitions 
The  problem  of  the  present  chapter  is,  as  has  already  been 
pointed  out,  closely  related  to  that  of  Chapter  VI.     In  both 
cases  the  investigation,  concerns  the  influence  of  an  increasing 
number  of  repetitions  on  the  fixation  of  the  series  of  syllables,        ; 
a  fixation  made  increasingly  stronger  thereby.     In  the  former 
case  the  total  number  of  repetitions  immediately  succeeded  each\ 
other  without  regard  to  whether  the  spontaneous  reproduction  of  j    ' ' 
the  series  was  obtained  through  them  or  to  how  it  was  obtained.    V 
In  this  case  the  repetitions  were  distributed  over  several  days  and  L 
the  attainment  of  the  first  possible  reproduction  was  employed 
for  their  apportionment  on  the  separate  days.     If,  now,  the 
results  obtained  in  both  cases  have,  at  least  for  my  own  per- 
sonality, any  wider  validity,  we  should  expect  that  in  so  far 
as  they  are  comparable,  they  would  harmonise.     That  is,  we 
should  expect  in  this  case  as  in  the  former  that  the  effect  of 
the  later  repetitions  (therefore,  those  of  the  2nd,  3rd,  and  later 
days),  would  at  first  be  approximately  as  great  as  that  of  the 
earlier,  and  later  would  decrease  more  and  more. 

A  more  exact  comparison  is  in  the  nature  of  the  case  not  now 
possible.  In  the  first  place,  the  series  of  Chapter  VI  and  the 
present  ones  are  of  different  length.  In  the  second  place,  the 
detailed  ascertainment  of  the  effect  of  the  repetitions  of  the 
succssive  days  taken  solely  by  themselves  would  be  possible  only 
through  assumptions  which  might  be  plausible  enough  on  the 
basis  of  the  data  presented,  but  which  would  be  easily  contro- 
vertible  on  account  of  the  insecurity  of  these  data. 

We  found,  for  example,  that  nine  12-sy liable  series  were 
learned  on  six  successive  days  by  means  of  158,  109,  75,  56,  37 
and  31  repetitions.  The  effect  of  the  first  158  repetitions  is 
here  immediately  given  in  the  109  repetitions  of  the  succeeding 
day  in  the  difference,  158 —  109.  But  if  we  wish  to  know  the 
intrinsic  effect  of  these  109  repetitions,  namely  the  saving 
effected  by  them,  on  the  third  day,  we  could  not  simply  take 
the  difference,  109  —  75.  We  should  need  to  know,  rather,  with 
how  many  repetitions  (x)  the  series  would  have  been  learned 


Memory 


on  the  third  day  if  no  repetitions  had  occurred  on  the  second, 
and  we  should  then  have  in  the  difference,  x  —  75,  the  separate 
effect  of  the  109  repetitions  actually  given.  Since  the  forgetting 
increased  somewhat  from  the  second  to  the  third  day,  x  would 
be  somewhat  greater  than  109.  In  the  same  way,  for  the  deter- 
mination of  the  effect  of  the  75  repetitions  of  the  third  day, 
we  should  need  to  learn  in  some  way  or  other  with  how  many 
repetitions  (y),  the  series  would  have  been  learned  by  heart  on 
the  fourth  day  which,  on  the  first  day,  required  158;  and  on 
the  second,  109.  The  difference,  y  —  56,  would  then  give  the 
measure  of  that  effect;  and  so  on.  For  the  ascertainment  of 
x,  the  results  of  Chapter  VII  give  a  certain  basis.  There  the 
result  was  that,  in  the  case  of  13-syllable  series,  the  amount 
forgotten  at  the  end  of  24  hours  was  to  that  forgotten  at  the 
end  of  2  x  24  hours  as  66  to  72.  But  the  employment  of  this 
relation,  itself  insecure,  «WoUW  be  justifiable  only  in  case  of  the 
i2-syllable  series,  and  would  accordingly  not  help  in  the  deter- 
mination of  y,  etc.  One  could  at  the  best  suppose  that  the 
resulting  quotients  would  approximate  yet  more  closely  to  unity. 
Accordingly  I  renounce  these  uncertain  assumptions,  and  con- 
tent myself  with  presenting  the  relations  of  the  successive  repe- 
titions to  the  successive  savings  by  showing  that  the  presupposed 
pure  effect  of  the  separate  repetitions  would  be  represented  by 
somewhat  greater  and  presumably  less  divergent  numbers. 


Number  of 
syllable's  of 
each  series 

The  following  savings  after  24  hours  resulted  from  each 
repetition  on  the  separate  days  (in  fractions  of  their 
own  value) 

I 

II 

HI 

IV 

V 

12 
24 
36 

0.31 
0.47 
0.57 

0.31 
0.44 
0.50 

0.25 
0.38 
0.29 

0.34 
0.32 
0.35 

0.16 
0.16 
0.18 

Although  the  course  of  these  figures,  which  are,  as  has  been 
said,  inexact  as  to  their  absolute  values,  is  tolerably  regular  in 
the  case  of  the  24-syllable  series  only,  its  general  character  agrees 
very  well  with  what  would  be  expected  from  the  results  of 
Chapter  IV.  The  effect  of  the  repetitions  is  at  first  approxi- 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Repeated  Learning  89 

mately  constant,  the  saving  in  work  which  results  from  these 
repetitions  increases  accordingly  for  a  while  proportional  to 
their  number.  Gradually  the  effect  becomes  less;  and  finally, 
when  the  series  has  become  so  firmly  fixed  that  it  can  be  repeated 
almost  spontaneously  after  24  hours,  the  effect  is  shown  to  be 
decidedly  less.  The  results  of  the  fourth  and  the  present  chap- 
ter, as  far  as  can  be  seen,  support  each  other. 

Nevertheless,  there  is  a  noteworthy  distinction  to  which  I  call 
attention.  \Yc  found  above  (p.  60)  that  six  i2-syllable  series, 
which  had  been  learned  at  a  given  time  with  an  average  of  410 
repetitions,  could  be  learned  by  heart  at  the  end  of  24  hours  with, 
on  the  average,  41  repetitions.  For  a  single  12-syllable  series, 
accordingly,  68  immediately  successive  repetitions  had  the  effect 
of  making  possible  an  errorless  recital  on  the  following  day  after 
7  repetitions.  T  In  the  present  research  with  distribution  of  the 
repetitions  over  several  days  the  same  effect  appears  on  the 
fourth  day:  9  12-sy liable  series  were  learned  by  heart  with  56 
repetitions.  Each  series,  therefore,  was  learned  with  about  6 
repetitions.  But  the  number  of  repetitions  which  were  neces- 
sary for  the  production  of  this  effect  in  the  case  of  the  nine 
series  amounted  to  only  158+109  +  75  =  342.  For  a  single 
series,  therefore,  the  number  was  38.  For  the  relearning  of  a 
1 2-sy liable  series  at  a  definite  time,  accordingly,  38  repetitions, 
distributed  in  a  certain  way  over  the  three  preceding  days,  had 
just  as  favorable  an  effect  as  68  repetitions  made  on  the  day 
just  previous.  Even  if  one  makes  very  great  concessions  to  the 
uncertainty  of  numbers  based  on  so  few  researches,  the  differ- 
ence is  large  enough  to  be  significant.  It  makes  the  assumption^ 
probable  that  with  any  considerable  number  of  repetitions  a  suit- 
able distribution  of  them  over  a  space  of  time  is  decidedly  more  j 
advantageous  than  the  massing  of  them  at  a  single  time. 

With  this  result,  found  here  for  only  very  limited  conditions, 
the  method  naturally  employed  in  practice  agrees.  The  school- 
boy doesn't  force  himself  to  learn  his  vocabularies  and  rules  alto- 
gether at  night,  but  knows  that  he  must  impress  them  again  in 
the  morning.  A  teacher  distributes  his  class  lesson  not  indif- 
ferently over  the  period  at  his  disposal  but  reserves  in  advance 
a  part  of  it  for  one  or  more  reviews. 


T 


CHAPTER  IX 

RETENTION   AS   A   FUNCTION   OF   THE  ORDER   OF 
SUCCESSION  OF  THE  MEMBERS  OF  THE  SERIES 

"How  odd  are  the  connections 
Of  human  thoughts  which  jostle  in  their  flight." 

Section  55.    Association  according  to  Temporal  Sequence  and  its 

Explanation 

I  shall  now  discuss  a  group  of  investigations  made  for  the 
purpose  of  finding  out  the  conditions  of  association.  The  results 
of  these  investigations  are,  it  seems  to  me,  theoretically  of 
especial  interest. 

The  non-voluntary_jre-emergence  of  mental  images  out  of  the 
darkness  of  memory  into  the  light  of  ccJnsciousness  takes  place, 
as  has  already  been  mentioned,  not  at  random  and  accidentally, 
but  in  certain  regular  forms  in  accordance  with  the  so-called  laws 
of  association.  General  knowledge  concerning  these  laws  is  as 
old  as  psychology  itself,  but  on  the  other  hand  a  more  precise 
formulation  of  them  has  remained — characteristically  enough — 
a  matter  of  dispute  up  to  the  very  present.  Every  new  presen- 
tation starts  out  with  a  reinterpretation  of  the  contejnts  of  a  few 
lines  from  Aristotle,  and  according  to  the  condition  of  our  knowl- 
edge it  is  necessary  so  to  do. 

Of  these  "  Laws,"  now — if,  in  accordance  with  usage  and  it 
is  to  be  hoped  in  anticipation  of  the  future,  the  use  of  so  lofty 
a  term  is  permitted  in  connection  with  formulae  of  so  vague  a 
character — of  these  laws,  I  say,  there  is  one  which  has  never 
been  disputed  or  doubted.  It  is  usually  formulated  as  follows : 
Ideas  which  have  been  developed  simultaneously  or  in  immediate 
succession  in  the  same  mind  mutually  reproduce  each_  other,  and 
do  this  with  greater  ease  in  the  direction  of  the  original  suc- 
cession and  with  a  certainty  proportional  to  the  frequency  with 
which  they  were  together. 

90 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Succession  9 1 

This  form  of  non-voluntary  reproduction  is  one  of  the  best 
verified  and  most  abundantly  established  facts  in  the  whole  realm 
of  mental  events.  It  permeates  inseparably  every  form  of  repro- 
duction, even  the  so-called  voluntary  form.  The  function  of  the 
conscious  will,  for  example,  in  all  the  numerous  reproductions 
oT^the  syllable-series  which  we  have  come  to  know,  is  limited 
to  the  general  purpose  of  reproduction  and  to  laying  hold  of  the  1L 
first  member  of  the  series.  The  remaining  members  follow  auto- 
mafjcally,  so  to  speak,  and  thereby  fulfill  the  law  that  things 
which  have  occurred  together  in  a  given  series  are  reproduced 
in  the  same  order. 

However,  the  mere  recognition  of  these  evident  facts  has 
naturally  not  been  satisfying  and  the  attempt  has  been  made 
to  penetrate  into  the  inner  mechanism  of  which  they  are  the 
result.  If  for  a  moment  we  try  to  follow  up  this  speculation 
concerning  the  Why,  before  we  have  gone  more  than  two  steps 
we  are  lost  in  obscurities  and  bump  up  against  the  limits  of  our 
knowledge  of  the  How. 

It  is  customary  to  appeal  for  the  explanation  of  this  form  of 
association  to  the  nature  of  the  soul.  Mental  events,  it  is  said, 
are  not  passive  happenings  but  the  acts  of  a  subject.  What  is 
more  natural  than  that  this  unitary  being  should  bind  together 
in  a  definite  way  the  contents  of  his  acts,  themselves  also  unified  ? 
Whatever  is  experienced  simultaneously  or  in  immediate  suc- 
cession is  conceived  in  one  act  of  consciousness  and  by  that 
very  means  its  elements  are  united  and  the  union  is  naturally 
stronger  in  proportion  to  the  number  of  times  they  are  entwined 
by  this  bond  of  conscious  unity.  Whenever,  now,  by  any  chance 
one  part  only  of  such  a  related  complex  is  revived,  what  else 
can  it  do  than  to  attract  to  itself  the  remaining  parts  ? 

But  this  conception  does  not  explain  as  much  as  it  was  intended 
to  do.  For  the  remaining  parts  of  the  complex  are  not  merely 
drawn  forth  but  they  respond  to  the  pull  in  an  altogether  definite 
direction.  If  the  partial  contents  are  united  simply  by  the  fact 
of  their  membership  in  a  single  conscious  act  and  accordingly 
all  in  a  similar  fashion,  how  does  it  come  about  that  a  sequence 
of  partial  contents  returns  in  precisely  the  same  order  and  not 
in  any  chance  combination?  In  order  to  make  this  intelligible, 
one  can  proceed  in  two  ways. 


\ 


\1 


If 


92  Memory 

In  the  first  place  it  can  be  said  that  the  connection  of  the 
things  present  simultaneously  in  a  single  conscious  act  is  made 
from  each  member  to  its  immediate  successor  but  not  to  mem- 
bers further  distant.  This  connection  is  in  some  way  inhibited 
I  by  the  presence  of  intermediate  members,  but  not  by  the  inter- 
position of  pauses,  provided  that  the  beginning  and  end  of  the 
pause  can  be  grasped  in  one  act  of  consciousness.  Thereby  return 
is  made  to  the  facts,  but  the  advantage  which  the  whole  plausible 
appeal  to  the  unitary  act  of  consciousness  offered  is  silently 
abandoned.  For,  however  much  contention  there  may  be  over 
the  number  of  ideas  which  a  single  conscious  act  may  compre- 
hend, it  is  quite  certain  that,  if  not  always,  at  least  in  most 
cases,  we  include  more  than  two  members  of  a  series  in  any  one 
conscious  act.  If  use  is  made  of  one  feature  of  the  explanation, 
the  characteristic  ol..uj}itji,  as  a  welcome  factor,  the  other  side, 
the  manifoldness  of  the  members,  must  be  reckoned  with,  and 
the  right  of  representation  must  not  be  denied  it  on  assumed 
but  unstatable  grounds.  Otherwise,  we  have  only  said, — and 
it  is  possible  that  we  will  have  to  be  content  with  that — that  it 
is  so  because  there  are  reasons  for  its  being  so. 

There  is,  consequently,  the  temptation  to  use  this  second  form 
of  statement.  The  ideas  which  are  conceived  in  one  act  of  con- 
sciousness are^jt  is  true,~ajl  bound  together,  but  notltTtrrg^ame 
way.  The  strength  of  the  union  is.  rather,  .a  decreasing-  tifnrtinn 
of  the  time  or  of  the  number  of  intervening  members.  It  is 
therefore  smaller  in  proportion  as  theinterval  which  separates 
the  individual  members  is  greater.  Let  a,  b,  c,  d  be  a  series 
which  has  been  presented  in  a  single  conscious  act,  then  the  con- 
nection of  a  with  b  is  stronger  than  that  of  a  with  the  later  c; 
and  the  latter  again  is  stronger  than  that  with  d.  If  a  is  in  any 
way  reproduced,  it  brings  with  it  b  and  c  and  d,  but  b,  which  is 
bound  to  it  more  closely,  must  arise  more  easily  and  quickly  than 
c,  which  is  closely  bound  to  b,  etc.  The  series  must  therefore 
reappear  in  consciousness  in  its  original  form  although  all  the 
members  of  it  are  connected  with  each  other. 

Such  a  view  as  this  has  been  logically  worked  out  by  Herbart. 
He  sees  the  basis  of  the  connection  of  immediately  successive 
ideas  not  directly  in  the  unity  of  the  conscious  act,  but  in  some- 
thing similar:  opposed  ideas  which  are  forced  together  in  a 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Succession  93 

unitary  mind  can  be  connected  only  by  partial  mutual  inhibition 
followed  by  fusion  of  what  remains.  Yet  this,  for  our  purpose, 
is  not  essential.  He  proceeds  as  follows: 

"  Let  a  series,  a,b,c,d  .  .  .  be  given  in  perception,  then 
a,  from  the  very  first  moment  of  the  perception  and  during  its 
continuance,  is  subjected  to  inhibition  by  other  ideas  present  in 
consciousness.  While  a,  already  partially  withdrawn  from  full 
consciousness,  is  more  and  more  inhibited,  b  comes  up.  The 
latter,  at  first  uninhibited,  fuses  with  the  retiring  a.  c  follows 
and,  itself  uninhibited,  is  united  with  the  fast  dimming  b  and  the 
still  more  obscured  a.  In  a  similar  fashion  d  follows  and  unites 
itself  in  varying  degrees  with  a,  b,  and  c.  Thus  there  originates 
for  each  of  these  ideas  a  law  according  to  which,  after  the 
whole  series  has  been  forced  out  of  consciousness  for  some  time, 
in  its  own  way  on  its  renewed  appearance  each  idea  struggles 
to  call  up  every  other  idea  of  the  same  series.  Suppose  that  a 
arises  first,  it  is  more  closely  connected  with  b,  less  with  c,  still 
less  with  d,  etc.  But,  taken  in  the  reverse  order  b,  c,  and  d, 
all  in  an  uninhibited  condition,  are  fused  with  what  remains  of  a. 
Consequently  a  seeks  to  bring  them  completely  back  to  the  form 
of  an  uninhibited  idea;  but  its  effect  is  quickest  and  strongest 
upon  b,  slower  on  c  and  still  slower  on  d,  etc.  (whereby  closer 
'.inspection  shows  that  b  sinks  again  while  c  is  still  rising,  and 
that  in  the  same  way  c  sinks  while  d  rises,  etc.).  In  short,  the 
series  runs  off  as  it  was  originally  given.  Tf  we  suppose,  on  the 
contrary,  that  c  was  the  one  initially  reproduced,  then  its  effect 
on  d  and  the  succeeding  members  is  similar  to  that  revealed  by 
a — i.e.,  the  series  c,  d,  .  runs  off  gradually  in  con- 

formity with  its  order,  b  and  a,  however,  experience  an  alto- 
gether different  influence.  With  their  separate  conscious  resi- 
dues, the  uninhibited  c  had  fused;  its  effect  upon  a  and  b  was 
therefore  wjthout  loss  of  power  and  without  delay,  but  this 
effect  was  limited  to  bringing  back  the  conscious  residues  of  a 
and  b  bound  up  with  it,  only  a  part  of  b  and  a  still  smaller  part 
of  a  being  recalled  to  consciousness.  This,  then,  is  what  happens 
if  the  process  of  recall  begins  anywhere  at  the  middle  of  a  known 
series.  That  which  preceded  the  point  of  recall  rises  at  once 
in  graded  degrees  of  clearness.  That  which  followed,  on  the 
contrary,  runs  off  in  the  order  of  the  original  series^  The  series, 


94  Memory 

however,  never  runs  backwards,  an  anagram  is  never  formed  out 
of  a  well  understood  word  without  voluntary  effort."1 

According  to  this  conception,  therefore,  the  associative  threads, 
which  hold  together  a  remembered  series,  are  spun  not  merely 
between  each  member  and  its  immediate  successor,  but  beyond 
intervening  members  to  every  member  which  stands  to  it  in  any 
close  temporal  relation.  The  strength  of  the  threads  varies  with 
the  distance  of  the  members,  but  even  the  weaker  of  them  must 
be  considered  as  relatively  of  considerable  significance. 

The  acceptance  or  rejection  of  this  conception  is  clearly  of 
great  importance  for  our  view  of  the  inner  connection  of  mental 
events,  of  the  richness  and  complexity  of  their  groupings  and 
organisation.  But  it  is  clearly  quite  idle  to  contend  about  the 
matter  if  observation  is  limited  to  conscious  mental  life,  to  the 
registration  of  that  which  whirls  around  by  chance  on  the  surface 
of  the  sea  of  life. 

For,  according  to  the  hypothesis,  the  threads  which  connect 
one  member  to  its  immediate  successor  although  not  the  only 
one  spun,  are,  however,  stronger  than  the  others.  Consequently, 
they  are,  in  general,  as  far  as  appearances  in  consciousness  are 
concerned,  the  important  ones,  and  so  the  only  ones  to  be 
observed. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  methods  which  lie  at  the  basis  of  the 
researches  already  described  permit  the  discovery  of  connections 
of  even  less  strength.  This  is  done  by  artificially  strengthening 
these  connections  until  they  reach  a  definite  and  uniform  level  of 
reproducibility.  I  have,  therefore,  carried  on  according  to  this 
method  a  rather  large  number  of  researches  to  test  experimentally 

1  Herbart,  Lehrb.  z.  Psychol.,  Sect.  29.  A  similar  "  pleasing "  view, 
as  he  calls  it,  was  developed  by  Lotze,  Metaphysik  (1879)  p.  527,  with 
the  modification  that  he  attempts  to  eliminate  the  notion  of  varying 
strength  of  the  ideas,  which  view  he  rejects.  In  accordance  with  the 
view  mentioned  first  above,  he  sees  the  real  reason  for  a  faithful  repro- 
duction of  a  series  of  ideas  in  the  fact  that  association  is  made  only 
from  one  link  to  the  following  link.  Accordingly,  he  teaches,  in  his 
Lectures  on  Psychology  (p.  22),  "Any  two  ideas,  regardless  of  con- 
tent, are  associated  when  they  are  produced  either  simultaneously  or 
in  immediate  succession — i.e.,  without  an  intervening  link.  And  upon 
this  can  be  based  without  further  artifice  the  special  ease  with  which 
we  reproduce  a  series  of  ideas  in  their  proper  order  but  not  out  of 
that  order.  By  "  further  artifice "  he  seems  to  mean  Herbart's  attempt 
at  an  arrangement. 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Succession  95 

in  the  field  of  the  syllable-series  the  question  at  issue,  and  to 
trace  an  eventual  dependence  of  the  strength  of  the  association 
upon  the  sequence  of  the  members  of  the  series  appearing  in  suc- 
cession in  consciousness. 

Section  36.  Methods  of  Investigation  of  Actual  Behavior 
Researches  were  again  carried  out  with  six  series  of  i6-syllables 
each.  For  greater  clearness  the  series  are  designated  with  Roman 
numbers  and  the  separate  syjlajjles  with  Arabic.  A  syllable  group 
of  the  following  form  constituted,  then,  each  time  the  material 
for  research: 


1(1)    1(2)    1(3) 


If  I  learn  such  a  group,  each  series  by  itself,  so  that  it  can  be 
repeated  without  error,  and  24  hours  later  repeat  it  in  the  same 
sequence  and  to  the  same  point  of  mastery,  then  the  latter  repe- 
tition is  possible  in  about  two  thirds  of  the  time  necessary  for 
the  first.1  The  resulting  saving  in  work  of  one  third  clearly 
measures  the  strength  of  the  association  formed  during  the  first 
learning  between  one  member  and  its  immediate  successor. 

Let  us  suppose  now  that  the  series  are  not  repeated  in  pre- 
cisely the  same  order  in  which  they  were  learned.  The  syllables 
learned  in  the  order  I(i)  1(2)  1(3)  .  .  .  1(15)  I(i6) 
may  for  example  be  repeated  in  the  order  I(i)  1(3)  1(5) 

1  1  have  omitted  to  present  a  few  tests  with  series  of  16  syllables 
each  from  which  this  number  was  obtained,  because  the  results  of  the 
sixth  chapter  sufficiently  cover  this  point.  There  (p.  55),  we  saw 
that  six  series  of  16  syllables  each,  each  series  being  repeated  32  times, 
could  be  memorised  after  24  hours  in  an  average  of  863  seconds.  32 
repetitions  are,  on  an  average,  just  necessary  to  bring  about  the  first 
possible  reproduction  of  series  of  16  syllables  each.  Considering  the 
close  proportion  which  exists  between  the  number  of  repetitions  on  a 
given  day  and  the  saving  of  work  on  the  next,  it  cannot  much  matter 
whether  the  series  were  repeated,  each  32  times,  or  were  memorised 
each  to  the  first  possible  reproduction.  Since  the  latter  requires  about 
1,270  seconds,  the  work  of  repetition  on  the  following  day  amounts, 
as  stated  above,  to  about  two  thirds  of  this  time.  The  relative  saving 
when  i6-syllable  series  are  relearned  after  24  hours,  is,  therefore,  scarcely 
different  from  that  found  for  series  of  12  and  13  syllables  (Chapters 
VII  and  VIII),  while  it  gradually  increases  for  still  greater  length  of 
series. 


\ 


96  Memory 

.  .  .  I(i5).I(2)  1(4) ,1(6)  .  .  .  I (16),  and  the  re- 
maining series  with  a  similar  transformation.  There  will  first 
be,  accordingly,  a  set  composed  of  all  the  syllables  originally  in 
the  odd  places  and  then  a  set  of  those  originally  in  the  even 
places,  the  second  set  immediately  following  the  first.  The  new 
i6-syllable  series,  thus  resulting,  is  then  learned  by  heart.  What 
will  happen?  Every  member  of  the  transformed  series  was,  in 
the  original  series,  separated  from  its  present  immediate  neighbor 
by  an  intervening  member  with  the  exception  of  the  middle  term 
where  there  is  a  break.  If  these  intervening  members  are  actual 
obstructions  to  the  associative  connection,  then  the  transformed 
series  are  as  good  as  entirely  unknown.  In  spite  of  the  former 
learning  of  the  series  in  the  original  sequence,  no  saving  in  work 
should  be  expected  in  the  repetition  of  the  transformed  series. 
If  on  the  other  hand  in  the  first  learning  threads  of  association 
are  spun  not  merely  from  each  member  to  its  immediate  suc- 
cessor but  also  over  intervening  members  to  more  distant  syllables, 
there  would  exist,  already  formed,  certain  predispositions  for 
the  new  series.  The  syllables  now  in  succession  have  already 
been  bound  together  secretly  with  threads  of  a  certain  strength. 
In  the  learning  of  such  a  series  it  will  be  revealed  that  noticeably 
less  work  is  required  than  for  the  learning  of  an  altogether  new 
series.  The  work,  however,  will  be  greater  than  in  relearning 
a  given  series  in  unchanged  order.  In  this  case,  again,  the  saving! 
in  work  will  constitute  a  measure  of  the  strength  of  the  asso-| 
ciations  existing  between  two  members  separated  by  a  third. 
flf  from  the  original^ jirrangement  of  the  syllables  new  series  are 
formed  by  the  £>missidn\  of  2,  3,  or  more  intervening  members, 
analogous  considerations  result.  The  derived  series  will  either 
be  learned  without  any  noticeable  saving  of  work,  or  a  certain 
saving  of  work  will  result,  and  this  will  be  proportionally  less 
as  the  number  of  intervening  terms  increases. 

On  the  basis  of  these  considerations  I  undertook  the  following 
experiment.  I  constructed  six  series  of  16  syllables  each  with  the 
latter  arranged  by  chance.  Out  of  each  group  a  new  one  was 
then  constructed  also  composed  of  six  series  of  16  syllables  each. 
These  new  groups  were  so  formed  that  their  adjacent  syllables 
had  been  separated  in  the  original  series  by  either  i,  or  2,  or  3, 
or  7  intervening  syllables. 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Succession  97 

If  the  separate  syllables  are  designated  by  the  positions  which 
they  held  in  the  original  arrangement,  the  following  scheme 
results  : 


1(1)    1(2)    1(3) 


via)  .................................................................  ;..vi(i6) 

By  using  the  same  scheme  the  derived  groups  appear  as  follows  : 

By  Skipping  1  Syllable 
1(1)     1(3)     1(5)  ................    1(15)     1(2)     1(4)     1(6)...  K16) 

iid)  IKS)  IIP)  ...........  ii(i5)  lib)  n(4)  n(6)  ......  :::::::: 


VI(3)  ......................  71(15)  VI(2)  VI(4) 

By  Skipping  2  Syllables 

11$     T?$    I(10)    I(13)r&S     rl$     T?^       I(8)    I(U)    I(14)       I(3)       I(6)       KW    W2)    K15) 

1)   11(4)    11(7)  ............  11(16)   11(2)    11(5)  ............  11(14)    11(3)   11(6)  ...........  .  11(16) 


VI(4)  .................  VI(16)    VI(2)  VI(5)  ............  VI(14)  VI(3)  VI(6) 

By  Skipping  3  Syllables 

$\l   »!$     I(9)   I(13)     I(2)     I(6)   I(10)   I(14)     I(3)     I(7)   I^11)   KW>     K4)     K8)   1(12)   1(16) 
11(1)   11(5)  ............    11(2)   11(6)  ............    11(3)   11(7)  ............    11(4)   11(8)......  11(16) 


VI(5)  ............  VI(2)  VI(6)  .........  "...  VI(3)  VI(7)  ............  VI(4)  VI(8)  ...... 

By  Skipping  7  Syllables 

1(1)     1(9)    11(1)   11(9)  III(l)  111(9)  IV(1)  IV(9)    V(l)    V(9)  VI(1)  VI(9)   1(2)     1(10)   11(2)  11(10) 
111(2)111(10)  IV(2)IV(10)    V(2)  V(10)  VI(2)VI(10)     1(3)   1(11)   11(3)  11(11)  111(3)111(11)  1V(3)IV(11) 


As  a  glance  at  this  scheme  will  show,  not  all  the  neighboring 
syllables  of  the  derived  series  were  originally  separated  by  the 
number  of  syllables  designated.  In  some  places  in  order  to  again 
obtain  series  of  16  syllables,  greater  jumps  were  made;  but  in  no 
case  was  the  interval  less.  Such  places  are,  for  example,  in  the 
series  in  which  two  syllables  are  skipped,  the  transitions  from 
I(i||)to  1(2)  and  from  1(14)  to  I(s).  In  the  series  in  which 
7  intermediates  were  jumped,  there  are  seven  places  where  there 
was  no  previous  connection  between  successive  syllables  since 
the  syllables  in  question  came  from  different  series  and  the  dif- 
ferent series,  as  has  been  often  mentioned,  were  learned  inde- 
pendently. The  following  is  given  in  illustration:  1(9)  II (i), 
11(9)  III(i),  etc-  Tne  number  of  these  breaks  varies  with 
the  different  kinds  of  derivation,  but  in  each  case  is  the  same 
as  the  number  of  skipped  syllables.  On  account  of  this  difference, 


98  Memory 

the  derived  series  suffer  from  an  inequality  inherent  in  the  nature 
of  the  experiment. 

In  the  course  of  the  experiment  the  skipping  of  more  than  7 
syllables  was  shown  to  be  desirable,  but  I  refrained  from  carry- 
ing that  out.  The  investigations  with  the  six  i6-syllable  series 
were  carried  quite  far;  and  if  series  had  been  constructed  using 
greater  intervals,  the  breaks  above  mentioned  would  have  had 
too  much  dominance.  The  derived  series  then  contained  ever 
fewer  syllable-sequences  for  which  an  association  was  possible 
on  the  basis  of  the  learning  of  the  original  arrangement;  they 
were  ever  thus  more  incomparable. 

The  investigations  were  carried  on  as  follows : — Each  time  the 
six  series  were  learned  in  the  original  order  and  then  24  hours 
later  in  the  derived  and  the  times  required  were  compared.  On 
account  of  the  limitation  of  the  series  to  those  described  above 
the  results  are,  under  certain  circumstances,  open  to  a  serious 
objection.  Let  it  be  supposed  that  the  result  is  that  the  derived 
series  are  actually  learned  with  a  certain  saving  of  time,  then 
this  saving  is  not  necessarily  due  to  the  supposed  cause,  an  asso- 
ciation between  syllables  not  immediately  adjacent.  The  argu- 
ment might,  rather,  run  as  follows.  The  syllables  which  are 
first  learned  in  one  order  and  after  24  hours  in  another  are  in 
both  cases  the_ samesyllables.  By  means  of  the  first  learning 
they  are  impressed  nof  merely  in  their  definite  order  but  also 
purely  as_  individual  syllables ;  with  repetition  they  become  to 
some  extent  familiar,  at  least  more  familiar  than  other  syllables, 
which  had  not  been  learned  just  before.  Moreover  the  new 
series  have  in  part  the  same  initial  and  final  members  as  the 
old.  Therefore,  if  they  are  learned  in  somewhat  less  time  than 
tTie  first  series  .required,  it  is  not  to  be  wondered  at.  The  basis 
of  this  does  not  necessarily  lie  in  the  artificial  and  systematic 
change  of  the  arrangement,  but  it  possibly  rests  merely  on  the 
|  identity  of  the  syllables.  If  these  were  repeated  on  the  second 
day  in  a  new  arrangement  made  entirely  by  chance  they  would 
probably  show  equally  a  saving  in  work. 

In  consideration  of  this  objection  and  for  the  control  of  the 
remaining  results  I  have  introduced  a  further,  the  fifth,  kind  of 
derived  series.  The  initial  and  final  syllables  of  the  original 
series  were  left  in  their  places.  The  remaining  84  syllables,  inter- 
mediates, were  shaken  up  together  and  then,  after  chance 


Retention  as  a  Function  ,>/  Order  of  Succession 


99 


drawing,  were  employed  in  the  construction  of  new  series  between 
the  original  initial  and  final  series.    As  a  result  of  the  learning 
of  tJ-     original  and  derived  series  there  must  in  this  case  also  / 
be     -vealed  how  much  of  the  saving  in  work  is  to  be  ascribed 
merely  to  the  identity  of  thejyjlablejmasses  and  to  the  identity/ 
oLthejnitiaJ_Jaj^d_fi 

Section  37.    Results.    Associations  of  Indirect  Sequence 

For  each  group  of  original  and  derived  series  n  double  tests 
were  instituted,  55  therefore  in  all.  These  were  distributed 
irregularly  over  about  9  months.  The  results  were  as  follows : 

1)  With  derivation  of  the  series  by  skipping  one  intermediate  syllable. 


The  original  series  were 
learned  in  x  seconds 

The  corresponding  de- 
rived series,  in  y  seconds 

The  latter,  therefore, 
with  a  saving  of  z  seconds 

•s^  

y= 

z= 

1187 

1095 

92 

1220 

1142 

78 

1139 

1107 

32 

1428 

1123 

305 

1279 

1155 

124 

1245 

1086 

159 

1390 

1013 

377 

1254 

1191 

63 

1335 

1128 

207 

1266 

1152 

114 

1259 

1141 

118 

m    1273 

1121 

152 

2)  With  derivation  of  the  series  by  skipping  two  intermediate  syllables. 


X  

y= 

z  — 

1400 

1185 

215 

1213 

1252 

—39 

1323 

1245 

78 

1366 

1103 

263 

1216 

1066 

150 

1062 

1003 

59 

1163 

1161 

2 

1251 

1204 

47 

1182 

1086 

96 

1300 

1076 

224 

1276 

1339 

—63 

m  1250 

1156 

94 

ioo  Memory 

3)  With  derivation  of  the  series  by  skipping  three  intermediate  syllables. 


The  original  series  were 
learned  in  x  seconds 

The  corresponding  de- 
rived series,  in  y  seconds 

The  latter,  therefore, 
with  a  saving  of  z  seconds 

x= 

y= 

z= 

1282 

1347 

—65 

1202 

1131 

71 

1205 

1157 

48 

1303 

1271 

32 

1132 

1098 

34 

1365 

1235 

130 

1210 

1145 

65 

1364 

1176 

188 

1308 

1175 

133 

1298 

1209 

89 

1286 

1148 

138 

m    1269 

1190 

78 

4)  With  derivation  of  the  series  by  skipping  seven  intermediate  syllables. 


x== 

-y—  —  - 

z= 

1165 

1086 

79 

1265 

1295 

—30 

1197 

1091 

106 

1295 

1254 

41 

1233 

1207 

26 

1335 

1288 

47 

1321 

1278 

43 

1344 

1275 

69 

1322 

1328 

—6 

1224 

1212 

12 

1294 

1217 

77 

m  1272 

1230 

42 

5)  With   derivation  of  the  series  by  retaining  the   beginning  and  end 
syllables  and  arranging  the  remainder  by  chance. 


1305 

1302 

3 

1181 

1259 

—78 

1207 

1237 

—30 

1401 

1277 

124 

1278 

1271 

7 

1302 

1301 

1 

1248 

1379 

—131 

1237 

1240 

—3 

1355 

1236 

119 

1214 

1142 

72 

1147 

1101 

46 

m  1261 

1250 

12 

Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Succession  101 

To  summarize  the  results :  The  new  series  formed  by  skipping 
i,  2,  3  and  7  intermediate  members  were  learned  with  an  average 
saving  of  152,  94,  78  and  42  seconds.  In  the  case  of  the  con- 
struction of  a  new  series  through  a  mere  permutation  of  the 
syllables,  there  was  an  average  saving  of  12  seconds. 

In  order  to  determine  the  significance  of  these  figures,  it  is 
necessary  to  compare  them  with  the  saving  in  work  in  my  case 
in  the  relearning  of  an  unchanged  series  after  24  hours.  This 
amounted  to  about  one  third  of  the  time  necessary  for  the  first 
learning  in  the  case  of  i6-syllable  series,  therefore  about  42O/ 
seconds. 

This  number  measures  the  strength  of  the  connection  existing 
between  each  member  and  its  immediate  sequent,  therefore  the 
maximal  effect  of  association  under  the  conditions  established. 
If  this  is  taken  as  unity,  then  the  strength  of  the  connection  of 
each  member  with  the  second  following  is  a  generous  third  and 
with  the  third  following  is  a  scant  fourth. 

The  nature  of  the  results  obtained  confirm — for  myself  and 
the  cases  investigated — the  second  conception  given  above  and 
explained  by  means  of  a  quotation  from  Herbart.  With  repeti- 
tion of  the  syllable  series  not  only  are  the  individual  terms  asso- 
ciated with  their  immediate  sequents  but  connections  are  also 
established  betwen  each  term  and  several  of  those  which  follow 
it  beyond  intervening  members.  To  state  it  briefly,  there  seems 
to  be  an  association  not  merely  in  direct  but  also  in  indirect  suc- 
cession. The  strength  of  these  connections  decreases  with  the 
number  of  the  intervening  numbers ;  with  a  small  number  it  was, 
as  will  be  admitted,  of  surprising  and  unanticipated  magnitude. 

No  evidence  has  been  secured,  however,  establishing  the  facili- 
tation of  the  process  of  relearning  a  series  by  means  of  the  identity 
of  the  syllables  and  the  identity  of  the  initial  and  final  terms. 

Section  38.    Experiments  with  Exclusion  of  Knowledge 

I  have  hitherto  not  stated  the  probable  errors  of  the  results, 
in  order  to  discuss  their  reliability  more  fully  at  this  time. 

When  I  started  upon  the  experiment  I  had  no  decided  opinion 
in  favor  of  the  final  results.  I  did  not  find  facilitation  of  the 
learning  of  the  derived  series  essentially  more  plausible  than  the 
opposite.  As  the  numbers  more  and  more  bespoke  the  existence 


io2  Memory 

of  such  facilitation,  it  dawned  upon  me  that  this  was  the  correct 
and  natural  thing.  After  what  has  been  said  above  (p.  2jfi) 
one  might  think  that  in  the  case  of  the  remaining  experiments, 
this  idea  has  possibly  favored  a  more  attentive  and  therefore 
quicker  learning  of  the  derived  series,  and  so  has,  at  least, 
decidedly  strengthened  the  resulting  saving  in  work,  even  if  it 
has  not  caused  it  altogether. 

For  the  three  largest  of  the  numbers  found, — consequently,  for 
the  facilitation  of  the  work  which  took  place  in  the  case  of  the 
omission  of  I,  2,  and  3  intervening  syllables — this  objection  is  of 
slight  significance.  For  these  are  proportionately  so  large  that 
it  would  be  attributing  too  much  to  an  involuntary  heightening 
of  a  state  of  attention,  voluntarily  coricentratecf  without  this  to 
fhe  utmost,  if  an  actual  influence  is  ascribed  to  it  here.  More- 
over, the  gradation  of  the  numbers,  decisively  issuing  as  they  do 
from  the  distribution  of  the  individual  values  and  running  parallel 
with  the  number  of  skipped  intermediate  terms,  is  inconceivable 
on  any  such  hypothesis  as  this.  For  the  supposed  greater  con- 
centration of  the  attention  could  clearly  work  only  in  general. 
How  could  it  possibly  bring  about  so  regular  a  gradation  of 
numbers  in  the  case  of  tests  which  were  separated  from  each 
other  by  weeks  and  months? 

The  objection  presented  above  could  render  doubtful  only  the 
fourth  result,  the  proportionally  slight  saving  in  the  learning  of 
.series  formed  frorrT"^fEeTyerTes"by ^kipping  seven  intermediate 
terms.  ^ 

Clearly  in  this  case  the  exact  determination  of  the  difference 
is  of  especial  interest  because  of  the  significant  size  of  the  interval 
over  which  an  association  took  place. 

In  the  case  of  the  present  investigations  there  exists  the  pos- 
sibility of  so  arranging  them  that  knowledge  concerning  the  out- 
come of  the  gradually  accumulating  results  is  excluded  and  so 
that  consequently  the  disturbing  influence  of  secret  views  and 
desires  disappears.  I  have  accordingly  instituted  a  further  group 
of  30  double  tests  in  the  following  way  as  a  control  of  the  above 
results,  and  especially  of  the  least  certain  of  them. 

On  the  front  side  of  a  page  were  written  six  i6-syllable  series 
selected  by  chance  and  on  the  reverse  side  of  the  same  sheet  six 
series  formed  from  them  by  one  of  the  methods  of  derivation 
described  above  (p.  97).  For  each  of  the  five  transforma- 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Secession  103 

tions  6  sheets  were  prepared.  The  fronts  and  backs  of  these 
could  be  easily  distinguished  but  not  the  sheets  themselves.  The 
thirty  sheets  were  shuffled  together  and  then  laid  aside  until 
any  memory  as  to  the  occurrence  of  the  separate  syllables  in 
definite  transformations  could  be  considered  as  effaced.  Then 
the  front  side,  and  24  hours  later,  the  reverse  side  of  a  given 
sheet  were  learned  by  heart.  The  times  necessary  for  learning  the 
separate  series  were  noted,  but  they  were  not  assembled  and 
further  elaborated  until  all  30  sheets  had  been  completed.  Fol- 
lowing are  the  numbers. 

1)  With  derivation  of  series  transformed  by  skipping  one  intermediate 
syllable. 


The  original  series  were 
learned  in  x  seconds 

The  corresponding  de- 
rived series,  in  y  seconds 

The  latter,  therefore, 
with  a  saving  of  z  seconds 

1137 
1292 
1202 
1272 
1436 
1340 

y= 

1081 
1045 
1237 
1202 
1299 
1157 

z= 
56 
247 
—35 
70 
137 
183 

m    1280 

1170 

110 

2)  With  derivation  of  the  series  by  skipping  two  intermediate  syllables. 


x= 

y= 

z= 

1415 

1232 

183 

1201 

1290 

—89 

1291 

1156 

135 

1358 

1153 

205 

1232 

1254 

—22 

1168 

1107 

61 

m  1278 

1199 

79 

3)  With  derivation  of  the  series  by  skipping  three  intermediate  syllables 


x= 

•\7  

z= 

1205 

1166 

39 

1339 

1068 

271 

1179 

1293 

—114 

1238 

1196 

42 

1257 

1231 

26 

1240 

1122 

118 

m  1243 

1179 

64 

Memory 
4)  With  derivation  of  the  series  by  skipping  seven  intermediate  syllables. 


The  original  series  were 
learned  in  x  seconds 

The  corresponding  de- 
rived series,  in  y  seconds 

The  latter,  therefore, 
with  a  saving  of  z  seconds 

1191 
1191 
1237 
1350 
1308 
1289 

•y—  — 

1120 
1185 
1295 
1306 
1260 
1158 

z== 
71 
6 

—58 
44 
48 
131 

m    1261 

1221 

40 

5)  With  derivation  of  the  series  by  retaining  the  first  and  last  syllables 
in  position  and  changing  the  rest  by  chance. 


x= 

•y  

z= 

1305 

1180 

125 

1206 

1205 

1 

1310 

1426 

—116 

1163 

1089 

74 

1272 

1388 

—116 

1309 

1305 

4 

m  1261 

1266 

—5 

By  derivation  of  the  transformed  series  by  skipping  I,  2,  3,  7 
intermediate  syllables,  the  derived  series  were  therefore  learned 
with  an  average  saving  of  1 10,  79,  64,  40  seconds.  On  the  con- 
trary with  derivation  of  the  series  by  permutation  of  the  syllables 
the  learning  required  an  average  increase  in  expenditure  of  5 
seconds. 

Taken  as  a  whole,  these  last  results  exactly  confirm,  as  can 
be  seen,  the  result  that  was  obtained  at  the  beginning.  The  num- 
ber of  these  experiments  was  proportionally  small  and,  during 
the  course  of  each  experiment,  there  was  complete  exclusion  of 
knowledge  as  to  results.  In  spite  of  these  facts  and  although 
the  numbers,  considered  individually,  seem  to  be  distributed 
without  regard  to  law,  their  grouping,  when  taken  as  a  whole,  is 
seen  to  be  in  conformity  to  a  simple  law.  TJie_fewer_are__the 
intervening-members  -jadiich  separate  two^syjiables  of  a  series 
icfi  has  been  learnedjby  riea.rt,Jhe  lessjsjhe  resistance  offered 
oy  these  separated  syllables  to  their  being  tearneiHn  a  new  order. 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Secession  105 

And,  in  the  same  way,  the  fewer  are  these  intervening  terms,  the 
stronger  are  the  bonds  which,  as  a  result  of  the  learning  of  the 
original  series,  connect  the  two  syllables  across  the  intervening 
members. 

In  addition  to  agreeing  in  their  general  course,  the  numbers  for 
both  groups  of  experiments  also  agree  in  the  following  respect 
The  difference  between  the  first  and  second  numbers  has  the/ 
greatest  value,  and  that  between  the  second  and  third  has  the  least 
j^aluer~On~fEe  other  hand,  it  is  surprising  that,  with  respect  to 
their  absolute  size,  the  numbers  of  the  second  group  are  through-  i 
out  smaller  than  those  of  the  first.  Two  causes  may  be  broughT 
forwarder?  explanation  of  this  behavior,  which,  considering  the 
conformity  of  the  numbers,  can  scarcely  be  accidental.  It  may 
be  that  here  is  actually  revealed  that  influence  of  expectation 
which  has  already  been  mentioned.  On  the  basis  of  this 
hypothesis,  the  explanation  of  the  fact  that  the  numbers  of 
the  first  group  come  out  somewhat  too  large  is  that,  in  the 
course  of  the  experiment,  the  existence  of  a  saving  in  work 
in  the  case  of  the  derived  series  was  anticipated,  and  for  this 
reason  the  learning  of  the  series  took  place  involuntarily  with  a 
somewhat  greater  concentration  of  attention.  On  the  other 
hand,  it  may  be  that,  in  consequence  of  the  excluded  knowledge, 
there  has  been  at  work  in  the  case  of  the  numbers  of  the  second 
group  a  disturbing  element  which  has  made  them  smaller.  Here, 
to  be  sure,  during  the  learning  of  the  derived  series  a  very  lively 
curiosity  developed  concerning  the  category  of  transformation 
to  which  the  series  which  had  just  been  learned  belonged.  That 
this  must  have  had  a  distracting,  and  therefore  retarding,  in- 
fluence is  probable  not  only  in  itself  but  also  through  the  result 
obtained  from  the  series  derived  by  permutation  of  syllables. 
It  was  to  be  expected  that  the  identity  of  the  syllables,  as  well 
as  of  the  initial  and  end  terms,  would  make  itself  felt  in  this 
case  by  a  saving  of  work,  however  small  that  saving  might  be. 
The  latter  effect  appears,  it  is  true,  in  the  experiments  of  the 
first  group.  With  those  of  the  second  group,  however,  there  is 
noticeable,  instead  of  this  saving  of  work,  a  slight  additional 
expenditure  of  time.  This,  if  it  is  not  merely  accidental,  can 
scarcely  be  explained  otherwise  than  through  the  distracting 
curiosity  mentioned. 

It  is  possible  that  both  influences  were  at  work  simultaneously 


io6 


Memory 


so  that  the  first  experiments  gave  results  which  were  somewhat 
too  high;  and  the  second,  results  that  were  somewhat  too  low. 
It  is  allowable,  under  this  hypothesis,  to  put  the  two  sets  of 
figures  together  so  that  the  contrasting  errors  may  compensate 
each  other.  In  this  way  there  was  finally  obtained  out  of  the 
85  double  tests  the  following  table. 


Number  of 
intermediate 
syllables  skipped 
in  the  forma- 
tion of  the 

Time  for 
learning 
the 
original 
series 

Time  for 
learning 
the 
derived 
series 

Saving  of 
work  in 
learning 
the  derived 
series 

Probable 
error  of 
saving 
of  work* 

Saving  of 
work  in  % 
of  original 
learning 
time 

derived  series 

(The  numbers  of  the  four  middle  columns  denote  seconds) 

0 

(1266) 

(844) 

(422) 

(33.3) 

1 

1275 

1138 

137 

±  16 

10.8 

2 

1260 

1171 

89 

±  18 

7.0 

3 

1260 

1186 

73 

±  13 

5.8 

7 

1268 

1227 

42 

±    7 

3.3 

permutation 

of  syllables 

1261 

1255 

6 

±  13 

0.5 

*  The  probable  errors  are  calculated  from  the  separate  values  for  savings 
of  work,  while  the  latter,  which  were  actually  obtained  by  subtraction, 
are  considered  as  the  results  of  direct  observation.  (See  p.  67,  note.) 

Section  39.    Discussion  of  Results 

In  the  foregoing  table  an  especial  interest,  it  seems  to  me, 
is  connected  with  the  last,  and  also  with  the  next  to  the  last, 
row  of  numbers.  When  there  was  complete  identity  of  all  the 
syllables  and  the  initial  and  end  terms  were  left  in  their  places, 
the  average  saving  of  time  for  17  tests  dealing  with  the  learning 
of  the  derived  series  was  so  slight  that  it  was  hardly  to  be 
determined.  It  fell  within  half  of  its  probable  error.  The 
syllables  were,  therefore,  in  themselves,  outside  of  their  con- 
nection, so  familiar  to  me  that  they  did  not  become  noticeably 
more  familiar  after  being  repeated  32  times.  On  the  contrary 
when  a  related  series  was  repeated  the  same  number  of  times, 
each  syllable  became  so  firmly  bound  to  the  syllable  which  fol- 
lowed 8  places  beyond  that  24  hours  later  the  influence  of  this 
connection  could  be  determined  in  no  doubtful  fashion.  It 
attains  a  value  6  times  the  probable  error.  Its  existence,  there- 
fore, must  be  considered  to  be  fully  proved  although  naturally 
we  cannot  be  so  sure  that  its  size  is  exactly  what  it  was  found 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Succession  107 

to  be  in  the  experiments.  Although  its  absolute  value  is  small, 
yet  its  influence  amounts  to  one  tenth  of  that  of  the  connection 
which  binds  every  member  to  its  immediate  successor.  It  is  so 
significant,  and  at  the  same  time  the  decrease  in  the  after-effect 
of  connections  which  were  formed  over  2,  3,  7  intervening  mem- 
bers is  so  gradual  a  one,  that  the  assertion  can  be  made,  on 
these  grounds  alone,  that  even  the  terms  which  stand  still 
further  from  one  another  may  have  been  bound  to  each  other 
subconsciously  by  threads  of  noticeable  strength  at  the  time  of 
the  learning  of  the  series. 

I  will   summarise  the  results   so  far  given  in  a  theoretical 
generalisation.     As   a  result  of  the  repetition  of  the  syllable- 
series  certain  connections  are  established  between  each  member 
and  all  those  that  follow  it.    These  connections  are  revealed  by 
the  fact  that  the  syllable-pairs  so  bound  together  are  recalled 
to  mind  more  easily  and  with  the  overcoming  of  less  friction 
than  similar  pairs  which  have  not  been  previously  united    The  \ 
strength  of  the  connection,  and  therefore  the  amount  of  workx 
which  is  eventually  saved,  is  a  decreasing  function  of  the  timej 
or  of  the  mimber  of  the  intervening  members  which  separated  ; 
the  syllables  in  question  from  one  another  in  the  original  series. y 
It  is   a  maximum  for  immediately  successive  members.     The/ 
precise  character  of  the   function  is  unknown   except  that  it' 
decreases  at  first  quickly  and  then  gradually  very  slowly  witty 
the  increasing  distance  of  the  terms. 

If  the  abstract  but  familiar  conceptions  of  '  power,'  '  disposi- 
tion,' be  substituted  for  the  concrete  ideas  of  saving  in  work 
and  easier  reproduction,  the  matter  can  be  stated  as  follows. 
As  a  result  of  the  learning  of  a  series  each  member  has  a 
tendency,  a_1g,tent  disposition,,  to  draw  after  itself,  at  its  own 
return  to  consciousness,  all  the  members  of  the  series  which 
followed  it.  These  tendencies  are  of  varying  strength.  They 
are  the  strongest  for  the  members  which  immediately  follow. 
These  tendencies  are  accordingly  in  general  most  easily  demon- 
strable in  consciousness.  The  series  will  return  in  its  original 
form  without  the  intervention  of  other  influences  while  the 
forces  directed  to  the  resuscitation  of  the  remaining  members 
can  be  explicitly  demonstrated  only  by  the  introduction  of  other 
conditions. 


io8  Memory 

It  is  naturally  not  conceivable  that  by  a  mere  caprice  of 
nature  the  validity  of  the  principles  discovered  should  be  limited 
exclusively  to  the  character  of  the  material  in  which  they  were 
obtained — i.e.,  to  series  of  nonsense  syllables.  They  may  be 
assumed  to  hold  in  an  analogous  way  for  every  kind  of  idea- 
series  and  for  the  parts  of  any  such  series.  It  goes  without 
saying,  wherever  relations  exist  between  the  separate  ideas, 
other  than  those  of  temporal  sequence  and  separation  by  inter- 
mediate members,  these  forces  will  control  the  associative  flow, 
not  exclusively,  but  with  reference  to  all  the  modifications  and 
complications  introduced  by  relations  of  various  affinities,  con- 
nection, meaning,  and  the  like. 

At  any  rate,  it  will  not  be  denied  that  the  doctrine  of  Asso- 
ciation would  gain  through  a  general  validity  of  these  results  a 
genuine  rounding  out  and,  so  to  say,  a  greater  reasonableness. 
The  customary  formulation,  "  ideas  become  associated  if  they 
are  experienced  simultaneously  or  in  immediate  succession,"  has 
something  irrational  about  it.  If  the  immediacy  of  succession 
is  taken  precisely,  the  principle  contradicts  the  most  common 
experiences.  If  it  is  not  taken  exactly,  then  it  is  hard  to  state 
'  what  kind  of  sequence  is  properly  meant.  At  the  same  time 
it  is  not  clear  why  a  sequence  not  quite  direct  should  have  an 
advantage  which  suddenly  disappears  in  the  case  of  a  sequence 
still  more  indirect.  As  we  now  know,  the  directness  or  indirect- 
ness of  the  sequence  is  without  effect  upon  the  general  nature  of 
what  happens  between  ideas  which  succeed  each  other.  \  In  both 
cases  connections  are  formed  which  on  account  of. their  com- 
plete similarity  can  be  designated  only  by  the  common  term, 
Association.  But  these  are  of  different  strength.  As  the  sue-  / 
cession  of  united  ideas  approaches  ideal  immediacy  the  connect- 
ing threads  grow  stronger,  and  in  proportion  as  it  departs  from 
this  ideal,  these  threads  grow  weaker.  The  associations  between 
more  distant  terms,  although  actually  present  and  demonstrable 
under  proper  conditions  have,  nevertheless,  on  account  of  their 
I  slight  strength,  practically  no  significance.  The  associations 
/  between  adjacent  terms  are,  on  the  contrary,  of  relatively  great 
/  importance,  and  will  make  their  influence  abundantly  felt.  Of. 
course,  if  the  series  were  left  entirely  to  themselves  and  if  they 
were  always  produced  in  precisely  the  same  order,  for  each 
term  there  would  appear  only  one  association,  the  relatively 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Succession  109 

strongest — namely,  that  with  the  immediately  succeeding  tenn. 
But  series  of  ideas  are  never  left  to  themselves.  The  rich  and 
quickly  changing  order  of  events  brings  them  into  the  most 
manifold  relations.  They  return  with  their  members  in  the  most 
varied  combinations.  And  then,  under  certain  circumstances, 
the  stronger  of  these  less  strong  associations  between  more  dis- 
tant terms  must  find  opportunity  to  authenticate  their  existence 
and  to  enter  into  the  inner  course  of  events  in  an  effective  way. 
It  is  easy  to  see  how  they  must  favor  a  more  rapid  growth,  a 
richer  differentiation,  and  a  many-sided  ramification  of  the  ideas 
which  characterise  the  controlled  mental  life.  Of  course  they 
also  favor  a  greater  manifoldness,  and  so  apparently  a  greater 
arbitrariness  and  irregularity,  in  mental  events. 

Before  I  proceed  further,  I  wish  to  add  a  few  words  con- 
.cerning  the  above  mentioned  (p.  91)  derivation  of  the  asso- 
ciation of  successive  ideas  from  the  unitary  consciousness  of  a 
unitary  soul.  There  is  a  certain  danger  in  bringing  together  a 
present  result  with  one  found  previously.  I  mentioned  above 
(p.  47)  that  the  number  of  syllables  which  I  can  repeat  without 
error  after  a  single  reading  is  about  seven.  One  can,  with  a 
certain  justification,  look  upon  this  number  as  a  measure  of  the 
ideas  of  this  sort  which  I  can  grasp  in  a  single  unitary  conscious 
act.  As  we  just  now  saw,  associations  are  formed  of  noticeable 
strength  over  more  than  seven  intervening  members,  therefore 
between  the  beginning  and  end  of  a  nine-syllable  series.  And 
on  account  of  the  size  of  the  numbers  obtained  and  the  nature 
of  their  gradation,  it  seems  probable  that,  even  with  a  larger 
number  of  syllables,  connections  would  be  formed  between  their 
extremes.  If,  however,  associations  are  built  between  members 
too  far  separated  to  be  held  together  in  a  single  conscious  act, 
it  is  no  longer  possible  to  explain  the  presence  of  those  asso- 
ciations on  the  basis  of  the  simultaneous  presence  of  the  united 
ideas  in  consciousness. 

However,  I  recognise  that  those  for  whom  such  a  derivation 
is  a  cherished  matter  are  not  necessarily  forced  by  the  above 
discussion  to  abandon  their  conception.  Such  are  those  who 
consider  the  unitary  acts  of  a  unitary  soul  as  something  more 
original,  intelligible,  transparent  or  better  worthy  of  belief  than 
the  simple  facts  of  association  described  above,  so  that  the 
reduction  of  the  latter  to  the  former  would  be  a  noteworthy 


no  Memory 

achievement.  One  needs  but  to  say  that,  in  the  case  of  an 
unfamiliar  sequence  of  syllables,  only  about  seven  can  be 
grasped  in  one  act,  but  that  with  frequent  repetition  and  gradu- 
ally increasing  familiarity  with  the  series  this  capacity  of  con- 
sciousness may  be  increased.  So,  for  example,  a  series  of  16 
syllables,  which  have  been  thoroughly  memorised,  may  be  present 
in  a  single  conscious  act.  Accordingly  this  "  explanation  "  is 
freely  available.  Those  for  whom  it  was  of  value  in  the  case 
of  association  by  simultaneity  or  immediate  succession  can 
employ  it  fully  as  well  for  our  case  of  indirect  sequence.  And 
because  of  the  modest  requirements  which  in  psychology  are  so 
often  imposed  upon  explanations,  this  view  will  doubtless  for 
a  long  time  serve  to  make  dim  the  vision  and  so  prevent  the 
frank  recognition  of  this  as  one  of  the  most  wonderful  of  all 
riddles,  and  it  will  also  act  as  a  hindrance  in  the  search  for  its 
true  understanding. 

Section  40.     Reverse  Associations 

Of  the  many  problems  which  spring  out  of  the  results  pre- 
sented,! have  been  able  for  the  time  being  to  investigate  only 
a  few  and  these  by  means  of  only  a  small  number  of  experiments. 

As  a  result  of  the  frequent  repetition  of  a  series — a,  b,  c,  d 
.  — certain  connections — ab,  ac,  ad,  bd,  etc. — are 
formed.  The  idea  a,  whenever  and  however  it  returns  to  con- 
sciousness, has  certain  tendencies  of  different  strength  to  bring 
also  with  it  to  consciousness  the  ideas  b,  c,  d.  Are  now  these 
connections  and  tendencies  reciprocal?  That  is,  if  at  any  time 
r  and  not  a  is  the  idea  by  some  chance  revived,  does  this  have, 
dn  addition  to  the  tendency  to  bring  d  and  e  back  with  it,  a 
similar  tendency  in  the  reverse  direction  towards  b  and  af  In 
other  words : — As  a  result  of  the  previous  learning  of  a,  b,  c^  d, 
the  sequences  a,  b,  c;  a,  c,  e,  are  more  easily  learned  than  any 
grouping  of  equal  length  of  syllables  previously  unknown  such 
as  p,  q,  r.  .  .  .  Is  the  same  thing  true  of  the  sequences 
c  b  a,  and  e  c  a?  As  a  result  of  manifold  repetition  of  a  series 
are  associations  also  formed  in  the  reverse  order? 

The  views  of  the  psychologists  seem  to  be  divergent  upon  this 
point.  One  side  call  attention  to  the  undoubted  fact  that  in 
spite  of  complete  mastery  of,  say,  the  Greek  alphabet  a  person 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Succession  1 1 1 

is  not  at  all  in  a  position  to  repeat  it  readily  backwards  if  he 
has  not  specially  studied  and  practiced  it  in  this  form. 

The  other  side  make  extensive  use  of  reverse  associations,  as 
of  something  quite  intelligible,  in  their  explanation  of  the  origin 
of  voluntary  and  purposive  movements.  According  to  them  the 
movements  of  the  child  are  at  first  involuntary  and  accidental. 
With  certain  combinations  of  these,  intensely  pleasurable  feel- 
ings result.  In  the  case  of  movements  as  of  feelings,  memory 
tracesTemain  which,  by  repetition  of  the  occurrences,  are  always 
more  closely  associated  with  each  other.  If  this  connection  has 
attained  a  certain  strength,  the  mere  idea  of  the  agreeable  feeling  { 
leads  backwards  to  the  idea  of  the  movement  which  aroused  it ;  I 
then  comes  the  actual  movement  and  with  it  also  the  actual 
sensed  feeling. 

The  conception  of  Herbart,  which  we  learned  to  know  above 
(p.  94),  holds  the  middle  course  between  these  two  views.  The 
idea  c,  which  appears  in  the  course  of  a  series,  fuses  with  the 
ideas  b  and  a,  which  have  preceded  it  and  which  are  yet  present 
although  becoming  dim.  If  c  is  later  on  reproduced,  it  brings 
b  and  a  with  it  but  dimmed,  not  fully  uninhibited  or  clearly 
conscious.  With  the  sudden  arousal  of  a  member  out  of  the 
midst  of  a  series  we  survey  that  which  preceded  "  at  once  in 
graded  clearness  " ;  but  never  does  it  happen  that  the  series  runs 
off  in  reverse  order.  To  the  member  which  springs  up  in  con- 
sciousness there  succeed  in  due  order  and  in  complete  conscious- 1 
ness  those  terms  which  followed  it  in  the  original  series. 

For  the  purpose  of  testing  the  actual  relations  I  carried  out 
an  experiment  entirely  similar  to  the  previously  described  in- 
vestigations. Out  of  groups  each  composed  of  six  i6-syllable 
series  arranged  by  chance^  new  groups  were  derived  either 
through  mere  reversal  of  the  sequence  or  by  that  plus  the 
skipping  of  an  intermediate  syllable.  Then  the  two  sets  of 
groups  were  learned  by  heart,  the  derived  form  24  hours  later 
than  the  original. 

If  the  scheme  for  the  original  form  is  written  as  follows : 

I(i)   1(2)   1(3) I(i5)   I(i6),  then  the  corresponding 

derived  series  is  thus  designated: 

In  the  case  of  mere  reversal  of  the  syllable  sequence: 

1(2)  1(0, 


112 


Memory 


In  the  case  of  reversal  plus  skipping  of  an  intermediate  syllable, 

I(i6)   I(i4)   I(i2). ...1(4)   1(2)   I(i5)   I(i3). -..1(3)   1(0. 
For  the  first  kind  of  derivation  I  have  carried  out  ten  experi- 
ments ;  for  the  second,  only  four. 
The  results  are  as  follows : 

1)  With  derivation   of  the  transformed  series  by  mere  reversal  of  the 
syllable  sequence. 


The  original  series  were 
learned  in  x  seconds 

The  corresponding  de- 
rived series,  in  y  seconds 

The  latter,  therefore, 
with  a  saving  of  z  seconds 

•y  —  -  - 

y= 

z= 

1172 

1023 

149 

13r7 

1170 

147 

1215 

977 

236 

1202 

1194 

8 

1257 

1031  - 

226 

1210 

1087 

123 

1285 

1051 

234 

1260 

1150 

110 

1245 

1070 

175 

132.9 

1189 

140 

m    1249 

1094 

155 

P.E.m=15 

In  relation  to  the  time  of  learning  the  original  series  the  saving 
amounts  to  12.4  per  cent. 

2)  With  derivation  of  the  transformed  series  by  reversal  and  at  the  same 
time  by  skipping  one  intermediate  syllable. 


x== 

y= 

z= 

1337 

1291 

46 

1255 

1164 

91 

1158 

1143 

15 

1313 

1224 

89 

m  1266 

1206 

60 

P.E.m=12 

In  relation  to  the  time  of  learning  the  original  series  the  saving 
amounted  to  5  per  cent. 

As  a  result  of  the  learning  of  a  series  certain  connectjqns  of 
the  members  are  therefore  actually  formed  in  a  reverse  as  well 
as  in  a  forward  direction.  These  connections  are  revealed  in 
this  way,  that  series  which  are  formed  out  of  members  thus 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Succession  113 

connected  are  more  easily  learned  than  similar  series,  whose 
individual  members   are  just  as   familiar  but  which  have  not 
been  previously  connected.     The  strength  of  the  predispositions  | 
thus  created  was  again  a  decreasing  function  of  the  distance  of  I 
the  members  from  each  other  in  the  original  series,     it  was,  ' 
however,  considerably  less  for  the  reverse  connections  than  for 
the  forward  ones,  the  "distances  being  equal.    With  an  approxi- 
mately equal  number  of  repetitions  of  the  series  the  member 
immediately   preceding   a  given   member   was   not   much   more 
closely  associated  with  it  than  the  second  one  following  it;  the 
second  preceding — so  far  as  may  be  determined  on  the  basis 
of  these  few  researches — scarcely  as  firmly  as  the  third  following. ' 

If  one  could  assume  a  more  general  validity  for  this  relation 
found  here  first  in  connection  with  syllable  series,  the  mutually 
opposed  experiences  just  mentioned  would,  I  believe,  become 
thoroughly  intelligible.  Where  a  series  consists  of  only  two 
members — as  in  the  case  of  the  connection  between  a  simple 
idea  of  movement  and  that  of  an  agreeable  feeling — then,  by 
means  of  frequent  repetition  the  end  term  will  acquire  so  strong 
a  tendency  to  call  up  after  itself  the  initial  term  that  the  latte^ 
will  actually  appear.  For  the  bringing  up  of  the  term  first  pre- 
ceding it  is  the  only  thing  for  which,  as  a  result  of  the  many 
repetitions,  the  second  term  has  acquired  a  predisposition.  But, 
no  matter  how  many  repetitions  there  may  be  in  the  case  of  a 
long  series,  it  will  never  happen  on  the  arousal  of  a  middle  term 
that  the  series  will  reappear  in  a  reverse  order.  For,  however 
easily  the  immediately  preceding  term  may  connect  itself  with 
the  one  for  the  moment  aroused,  the  immediately  succeeding 
term  will  appear  more  easily  by  far,  and  so  will  win  the  victory, 
provided  other  influences  do  not  intervene. 

No  matter  how  thoroughly  a  person  may  have  learned  the 
Greek  alphabet,  he  will  never  be  in  a  condition  to  repeat  it 
backwards  without  further  training.  But  if  he  chances  to  set 
out  purposely  to  learn  it  backwards,  he  will  probably  accomplish 
this  in  noticeably  shorter  time  than  was  the  case  in  the  previous 
learning  in  the  customary  order.  The  objection  is  not  in  point 
that  a  poem  or  speech  which  has  been  committed  to  heart  is 
not  necessarily  learned  more  quickly  backwards  than  it  was 
originally  forwards.  For  with  the  learning  in  reverse  direction 
the  numerous  threads  of  inner  connection  on  which  rapid  learn- 


ii4  Memory 

ing  of  meaningful  material  in  general  depends  will  be  brought 
to  nothing. 


Section  41.     The  Dependence  of  Associations  of  Indirect 
Sequence  upon  the  Number  of  Repetitions 

The  connection  set  up  as  a  result  of  many  repetitions  between 
the  immediately  succeeding  members  of  an  idea-  or  syllable- 
series  is  a  function  of  the  number  of  repetitions.  As  a  result 
of  the  investigations  of  Chapter  VI,  which  were  purposely  di- 
rected to  the  discovery  of  this  relation,  an  approximate  pro- 
portionality, within  tolerably  wide  limits,  has  been  made  out 
between  the  number  of  repetitions  and  the  strength  of  the  con- 
nections established  by  them.  The  latter  was  measured,  pre- 
cisely as  in  the  investigations  of  the  present  chapter,  by  the 
amount  of  work  saved  in  relearning  the  connected  series  after 
24  hours. 

If  now,  as  a  result  of  repetitions,  connections  are  also  set 
up  between  members  of  a  series  which  are  not  immediately  suc- 
cessive, the  strength  of  the  latter  is  naturally  also  in  some  way 
dependent  upon  the  number  of  repetitions.  The  question  arises 
in  what  form  the  different  dependence  occurs  in  this  case.  Does 
a  proportionality  exist  here  also?  If  the  number  of  repetitions 
is  made  greater,  will  the  threads  of  separate  strength,  which 
bind  together  all  the  members  of  a  series  learned  by  heart,  in- 
crease in  strength  in  the  same  proportion  ?  Or  is  the  nature  and 
rate  of  their  increase  in  strength  a  different  one  as  is  the  case 
with  the  strength  of  the  threads  themselves?  On  the  basis  of 
our  present  knowledge  neither  the  one  nor  the  other  of  these 
possibilities  can  be  declared  self-evident. 

To  facilitate  an  insight  into  the  actual  conditions  I  have  insti- 
tuted a  few  preliminary  experiments  in  the  following  way.  Six 
series  of  16  syllables  each  were  impressed  upon  the  memory 
by  a  1 6-  or  64- fold  attentive  repetition.  After  24  hours  an 
equal  number  of  derived  series  of  the  same  length,  which  had 
been  obtained  from  those  already  learned  by  skipping  one  inter- 
mediate syllable,  were  learned  by  heart  to  the  first  repetition. 
In  order  to  make  the  investigations  useful  in  other  ways,  the 
series  were  derived  in  this  case  by  a  method  somewhat  different 
from  that  described  above  (p.  97).  The  latter  method  differs 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Succession  1 1 5 

from  the  former  in  that  here  the  odd-numbered  syllables  of  the 
original  series  were  not  followed  by  the  even-numbered  syllables 
of  the  same  series.  But  all  the  odd-numbered  syllables  of  two 
original  series  were  united  to  form  a.  new  i6-syllable  series. 
Then  the  even-numbered  syllables  of  the  same  original  series 
were  united  to  form  a  second  new  series.  The  scheme  of  the 
derived  series  was  therefore  not,  as  above, 

1(1)     1(3)     1(5) 1(15)     1(2)     1(4) 1(16), 

11(1)    11(3)   11(5) 11(15)   11(2)   11(4) 11(16), 

but  rather 

1(1)     1(3)     1(5) 1(15)   11(1)   11(3) 

1(2)     1(4)     1(6) 1(16)   11(2)   11(4) II(16) 

The  effect  of  the  derivation  upon  the  learning  of  the  derived 
series,  cannot,  as  it  seems,  be  essentially  affected  through  this 
slight  change.  Here,  as  in  the  above  described  method  of  deriva- 
tion, the  syllables  which  during  the  first  learning  had  been  separ- 
ated from  each  other  by  an  intervening  syllable  were  learned 
24  hours  later  in  immediate  succession. 

For  each  number  of  repetitions  used  in  learning  I  made  8 
double  tests,  which  gave  the  following  results: 

Number  of  repetitions  employed  for  the  impression  of  each  of 
the  original  series : 

16  64 

Number  of  seconds  required  for  learning  the  six  derived  series 
after  24  hours  (including  the  recital)  : 

1178  1157 

1216  982 

1216  1198 

950  1148 

1358  995 

1019  1017 

1191  1183 

1230  1196 


Average  1170  1109 

Probable  error          30  22 

On  account  of  the  small  number  of  experiments  the  result- 
ing averages  are,  unfortunately,  not  very  exact;  but  the  general 
character  of  the  results  would  remain  the  same  even  if  we 
considered  the  value  false  within  the  whole  range  of  the  prob- 
able error.  This  character  becomes  apparent  upon  comparison 
with  the  values  given  above  (p.  56)  for  learning  by  heart  six 
i6-syllable  series  which  had  not  previously  been  learned.  This 
took  place  in  1,270  seconds.  After  the  original  series  had  been 


n6 


Memory 


repeated  16  times,  the  derived  series  was  learned  with  a  saving 
of  about  100  seconds ;  after  repetition  64  times,  with  a  like  saving 
of  161  seconds.  Quadrupling  the  repetitions  resulted  in  increas- 
ing the  saving  only  a  little  more  than  half  as  much  again.  The 
increase  in  strength  of  the  associations  reaching  over  an  inter- 
mediate member  was  in  nowise  proportional  to  the  number  of 
repetitions,  for  the  cases  studied,  not  even  within  the  limits 
for  which  this  was  noticeably  the  case  for  associations  from 
one  member  to  its  immediate  successor.  On  the  contrary  the 
effect  of  the  repetitions  in  the  case  of  associations  of  indirect 
sequence  decreased  considerably  sooner  and  more  quickly  than 
in* the  case  of  those  of  direct  sequence. 

There  is  very  close  agreement  between  the  pair  of  values  just 
found  and  the  number  given  above  (p.  99,  i) — the  procedure  be- 
ing, as  here,  without  the  exclusion  of  knowledge — for  the  learning 
of  derived  series  which  the  day  before  had  been  learned  in  their 
original  form  to  the  point  of  first  possible  reproduction.  This 
number,  it  is  true,  was  obtained  under  somewhat  different  con- 
ditions. In  the  first  place,  not  always  were  the  same  number 
\  of  ^repetitions  employed  for  learning,  but  each  time  as  many  as 
were  required  for  the  first  possible  reproduction — i.e.,  not  exactly, 
but  on  the  average,  32.  Moreover,  the  nature  of  the  derivation 
of  the  series  was  somewhat  different,  as  was  stated  above.  But 
these  differences  have  little  weight  in  the  case  of  numbers  which 
otherwise  could  have  little  claim  to  exactness.  I  adduce  there- 
fore this  value  for  comparison,  and  in  addition  the  numbers 
given  in  Chapter  VI  for  the  influence  of  repetitions  -on  the  re- 
learning  of  the  same  untransformed  series.  Here  then  is  the 
table. 


Time  for 

Time  for 

relearning 

Saving  in 

Number 

relearning 

after  24 

Saving  in 

Saving  in 

changed 

of 

the  untrans- 

hours series 

relearning 

learning 

series  in  % 

Repeti- 

formed 

transformed 

unchanged 

the  changed 

of  the  saving 

tions 

series  after 

by  skipping 

series 

series 

for  the 

24  hours 

one  syllable 

unchanged 

0 

1270 

16 

1078 

1170 

192 

100 

52% 

32 

863 

1121 

407 

149 

37% 

64 

454 

1109 

816 

161 

20% 

(The  numbers  of  the  four  intermediate  columns  mean  seconds.) 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Succession  117 

I  call  attention  again  to  the  fact  that  the  numbers  given  above 
are  in  part  rather  inexact  and  that  they  were  gained  under  very 
limited  conditions.  However,  it  is  allowable  to  sketch  sum- 
marily and  with  hypothetical  elaboration  the  view  which  these 
results  make  appear  to  be  the  most  probable  explanation  of  an 
important  group  of  inner  processes  and  which  fills  pleasingly  and 
completely  a  hitherto  empty  place  in  our  knowledge. 

With  the  imprinting  and  internal  fixation  of  an  idea-series  '• 
through  its  manifold  repetition,  inner  connectionsT  associa-  / 
tions,  are  woven  between  all  the  separate  members  of  the 
series.  The  nature  of  these  is  such  that  series  made  out  of 
members  thus  associated  are  picked  up  and  reproduced  more 
easily,  with  less  ^resistance  to  be  overcome,  than  similar  series 
made  up  of  members  not  previously  associated.  Their  nature 
can  also  be  stated  in  this  way,  that  each  member  of  the  series 
has  the  definite  tendency  on  its  own  return  to  consciousness  to 
bring  back  others  with  it.  These  connections,  or  tendencies,  are 
of  different  strength  from  several  different  points  of  view.  For 
the  more  distant  members  of  the  original  series  they  are  weaker 
than  for  the  nearer ;  for  specific  distances  backwards  they  are  j 
weaker  than  for  the  same  distances  forward.  The  strength  of 
all  the  connections  increases  as  the  number  of  repetitions  in- 
creases. But  the  originally  stronger  threads  between  the  nearer 
members  are  strengthened  considerably  more  quickly  than  the 
weaker  ones  which  connect  the  more  distant  terms.  The  more, 
therefore,  the  number  of  repetitions  increases,  the  stronger,  both 
absolutely  and  relatively,  become  the  connections  between  imme- 
diately successive  terms.  To  the  same  degree  the  more  exclusive 
and  dominant  becomes  the  tendency  of  each  term  at  its  own 
returfTmto  consciousness  to  draw  after  itself  that  term  which 
had  always  immediately  followed  it  during  the  repetitions. 

Section  42.    Indirect  Strengthening  of  Associations 

I  conclude  with  the  mention  of  a  noteworthy  fact  which  ap- 
peared incidentally  in  connection  with  the  investigations  men- 
tioned in  the  preceding  paragraphs.  On  account  of  the  uncer- 
tainty of  the  numerical  results  which  come  into  consideration,  I 
can  call  attention  to  it  only  with  great  reserve.  I  cannot,  how- 
ever, pass  it  by  altogether  because  it  is  probable  in  itself,  and 


1 1 8  Memory 

because,  with  further  confirmation,  it  will  throw  a  character- 
istic light  on  inner  processes  which  are  actually  present  but 
which   remain   unconscious.      It   will    also   reveal   the   relative/ 
independence  of  these  processes  from  conscious  accompaniments, 
as  I  have  shown  above  (§  24). 

The  derivation  of  the  transformed  series  in  the  case  of  the 
last  mentioned  investigations  was  accomplished,  as  has  been 
stated,  in  the  following  way.  Out  of  two  i6-syllable  series 
selected  by  chance,  first  all  the  odd-numbered  syllables  were 
combined  to  form  a  new  series  and  then  all  the  even-numbered 
to  form  a  second  series  which  followed  in  immediate  succession. 
In  the  case  of  a  group  consisting  of  six  series  of  this  sort, 
therefore,  the  derived  series  II  contained  nothing  but  syllables 
which  in  the  first  process  of  memorising  had  followed  imme- 
diately upon  the  corresponding  members  of  series  I.  The  derived 
series  IV  bore  a  similar  relation  to  series  III,  and  series  VI  to 
series  V.  The  following  phenomenon  appeared,  which  is  the 
peculiar  relation  to  which  I  wish  to  call  attention.  Less  time 
was  required  for  learning  by  heart  series  II,  IV,  VI  on  the 
average  than  for  series  I,  III,  V,  although  in  all  the  other  groups 
of  series,  whether  original  or  derived,  the  converse  was  the  case. 

I  adduce  some  numerical  data  in  evidence  of  this  relation. 

From  all  the  experiments  with  six  series  of  16  syllables  which 
were  learned  to  the  point  of  the  first  recital,  ten  immediately 
successive  experiments  are  chosen  by  chance  for  two  different 
time-periods.  The  times  for  committing  to  memory  series  I, 
III,  V  are  combined  in  calculation,  as  are  also  those  for  series 
II,  IV,  VI. 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Succession  119 

1 


A 

B 

J 

Sum  of  series 
(I,  III,  V) 

Sum  of  series 
(II,  IV,  VI) 

(B-A) 

467 

790 

323 

544 

666 

122 

662 

704 

42 

548 

668 

120 

523 

539 

16 

475 

657 

182 

612 

753 

141 

853 

548 

—305 

637 

641 

4 

499 

780 

281 

m  582 

675 

93 

P.E.m=±37 

488 

694 

206 

604 

704 

100 

551 

734 

183 

596 

637 

41 

559 

686 

127 

611 

744 

133 

653 

682 

129 

598 

700 

102 

723 

606 

—117 

643 

678 

35 

m  603 

687 

84 

P.E.m=±20 

The  sum  of  series  II,  IV  and  VI,  found  by  averaging  the  ten 
experiments,  is  here  in  both  cases,  as  can  readily  be  seen,  con- 
siderably greater  than  the  sum  of  series  I,  III,  V.  The  differ- 
ences are,  to  be  sure,  of  very  different  amounts  for  the  separate 
experiments,  and  in  one  case  they  have  a  pronounced  negative 
value ;  but  these  fluctuations  are  represented  in  the  large  probable 
error  of  the  differences  of  the  averages;  and,  in  spite  of  the 
size  of  these  errors,  the  positive  character  of  the  differences 
may  be  considered  as  fairly  certain. 

In  all  other  investigated  cases  the  following  result  appears: 
there  are  large  fluctuations  of  the  differences  in  the  individual 
experiments,  but  a  combination  of  the  several  experiments  shows 
a  decisive^  predominance  for  series  II,  IV,  VI  although  the 
surplus  is  smaller  than  in  the  case  of  the  two  experiments  in 
question.  Thus  in  the  case  of  n  earlier  tests  in  which  series 


120  Memory 

were  learned  by  heart  which  had  been  derived  by  skipping  one 
intermediate  syllable  and  which  had  been  learned  the  day  before 
in  the  original  form  the  results  were  (p.  99,  i)  : 

Sum  of  series  (II,  IV,  VI)  minus  Sum  of  series  (I,  III,  V) 
=*33  (P.E.m=*23). 

With  six  later  tests  of  the  same  sort  (p.  103,  i)  : 

Sum  of  (II,  IV,  VI)  minus  Sum  of  (I,  III,  V)  =42  (P.E.  m 
==29). 

With  ten  experiments  with  series  which  had  been  repeated 
the  day  before  16  times  each  (p.  55)  : 

Sum  of  (II,  IV,  VI)  minus  Sum  of  (I,  III,  V)  =  17  (P.E.m 
=  21),  etc. 

On  account  of  the  largeness  of  the  probable  error  a  single  one 
of  the  last  given  figures  would  have  little  significance.  By  means 
of  their  correspondence  as  to  the  nature  of  the  difference  they 
gain  in  probability,  and  the  phenomenon  becomes  quite  intelligible 
in  light  of  the  results  of  Section  18.  There,  and  with  especial 
clearness  in  the  case  of  i6-sy liable  series,  it  was  shown  that  the 
learning  of  the  individual  series  occurred  in  the  form  of  fairly 
regular  oscillations.  These  were  of  such  a  sort  that  a  relatively 
slowly  learned  series  followed  one  learned  relatively  more 
quickly  and  vice  versa  (p.  43,  Fig.  3).  Since  in  the  case  of 
each  experiment  the  first  series  was  learned  on  the  average  the 
most  quickly  and  the  second  the  most  slowly,  by  the  combination 
of  series  I,  III,  V  the  average  minima  are  united  and  of  series 
II,  IV,  VI  the  average  maxima.  The  difference,  5*  (II,  IV,  VI) 
minus  (I,  III,  V)  is,  therefore,  in  general  positive. 

Accordingly  it  must  be  surprising  that  in  the  case  of  both 
the  groups  of  tests  mentioned  in  the  preceding  paragraphs,  this 
difference  is  on  the  contrary  of  a  negative  sign. 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Succession 


121 


(1)  The  results  in  the  case  of  learning  derived  series  which  had  been  re- 
peated 16  times  on  the  day  previous  in  their  original  form  were  as  follows: 


A 
Sum  of 
(I,  HI,  V) 

B 
Sum  of 
(II,  IV,  VI) 

J 
(B-A) 

656 
702 
603 
450 
662 
560 
588 
637 

522 
514 
613 
500 
696 
459 
603 
593 

—134 
.  —188 
10 
50 
34 
—101 
15 
—44 

Av.  607 

562 

-^5  P.E.m  ±21 

(2)  The  results  of  learning  derived  series  which  had  been  repeated  64 
times  on  the  day  previous  in  their  original  form  were  as  follows: 


A 

Sum  of 
(I,  HI,  V) 

B 
Sum  of 
(II,  IV,  VI) 

A 
(B-A) 

515 

567 
626 
588 
543 
539 
584 
592 

642 
415 
572 
560 
452 
478 
599 
604 

127 
—152 
—54 
—28 
—91 
—61 
15 
12 

Av.  569 

540 

—29  P.E.m  ±20 

The  fluctuations  of  the  numbers  for  the  separate  experiments 
are  also  in  this  case  very  great.  However,  it  is  evident  on  the 
first  glance  and  without  further  comparison  that  a  strong  dis- 
placement of  the  differences  to  the  negative  side  has  taken  place. 
This  fact  is  also  expressed  by  the  averages.  In  contrast  with 
previous  results,  the  series  II,  IV,  VI  were  learned  in  somewhat 
shorter  time  than  series  I,  III,  V. 

That  this  exception  rests  on  mere  chance  is  possible  but  not 
very  probable.  The  piobable  errors,  although  large,  are  not 
large  enough  to  indicate  this. 

I  would  sooner  fear  that  it  was  a  case  of  disturbance  of  the 
results  through  the  oft-mentioned  source  of  error,  anticipation 
of  the  outcome  (p.  27  ff.  and  p.  101).  During  the  progress  of  the 
experiment  I  believed  with  increasing  certainty  that  I  could  fore- 


122  Memory 

see  the  smaller  expenditure  of  time  for  the  learning  of  series  II, 
IV,  VI,  and  it  was  only  because  I  thought  something  of  this 
sort  that  I  changed  the  method  of  derivation  of  the  transformed 
series.  I  cannot,  therefore,  exclude  the  possibility  that,  merely 
on  the  basis  of  this  hidden  presupposition  and  in  a  manner 
altogether  unrevealed  to  consciousness,  a  greater  concentration 
of  attention  was  present  in  learning  series  II,  IV,  VI  than  in 
learning  series  I,  III,  V.  However,  this  assumption  is  not  to 
be  taken  positively  as  the  correct  one.  The  assumption  that  the 
whole  of  the  difference  found  is  to  be  traced  back  to  the  influ- 
ence of  this  source  of  error  would  involve  the  ascription  of  a 
pretty  large  function  to  an  involuntary  and  completely  uncon- 
scious accommodation  of  attention  due  to  a  secret  expectation. 

There  remains,  accordingly,  a  certain  probability  for  the  third 
possibility,  namely,  that  the  contrasting  character  of  the  average 
differences  has  in  part  at  least  an  objective  basis,  that  the  more 
rapid  learning  of  the  derived  series,  II,  IV,  VI,  was  in  part 
due  to  their  manner  of  derivation. 

"  The  proper  way  in  which  to  think  of  this  causation  would 
become  clear  only  by  the  introduction  of  physiological  concep- 
tions which  must  first  be  constructed  or  at  least  remodelled. 
If  use  is  made  of  the  language  of  psychology,  then,  as  in  the 
case  of  all  unconscious  processes,  expression  can  be  only  figura- 
tive and  inexact. 

As  a  result  of  the  learning  by  heart  of  a  series  in  the  original 
form  the  separate  syllables,  we  must  say,  retain  fairly  strong 
tendencies  upon  their  own  return  to  consciousness  to  bring  after 
them  the  syllables  which  immediately  succeeded  them.  If,  there- 
fore, the  syllables  i,  3,  5,  etc.,  return  to  consciousness,  the 
syllables  2,  4,  6,  etc.,  have  a  tendency  also  to  appear.  This 
tendency  is  not  strong  enough  to  bring  about  as  a  consciously, 
perceivable  event  the  actual  appearance  of  2,  4,  6.  The  latter 
are  in  evidence  only  in  a  certain  inner  condition  of  excitability; 
something  takes  place  in  them  which  would  not  have  occurred 
if  i,  3,  5  had  not  been  repeated.  They  behave  like  a. forgotten 
name  which  one  attempts  to  recollect.  This  is  not  consciously 
present;  on  the  contrary,  it  is  being  sought.  In  a  certain  way, 
jowever,  it  is  undeniably  present.  It  is  on  the  way  to  con- 
sciousness, as  one  might  say.  For  if  ideas  of  all  sorts  were 
called  up  which  stood  in  connection  with  the  earlier  experienced 


Retention  as  a  Function  of  Order  of  Succession  123 

name,  a  person  could  usually  tell  whether  they  agreed  with  the 
one  now  sought  for  but  not  yet  found,  or  not.  As  a  result  of 
the  frequent  repetition  of  the  syllables  i,  3,  5  previously  con- 
nected with  the  syllables  2,  4,  6,  the  latter  were  placed  in  a 
similar  slightly  pronounced  condition  of  excitation,  lying  between 
conscious  appearance  on  the  one  side  and  simple  non-appearance 
on  the  other.  And  this  excitation  has,  as  it  now  appears  from 
our  tests,  a  result  altogether  similar  to  that  of  actual  return 
to  consciousness.  Inner  connections  are  established  between  suc- 
cessively and  internally  aroused  syllables  just  as  between  syllables 
successively  raised  to  consciousness,  except  that  the  former  are 
naturally  of  less  strength.  Secret  threads  are  spun  which  bind 
together  the  series  2,  4,  6,  not  yet  aroused  to  consciousness,  and 
prepare  the  way  for  its  conscious  appearance.  Such  threads 
existed  already  in  greater  strength  as  a  result  of  the  learning 
of  the  original  series ;  the  present  effect  is  that  of  strengthening 
somewhat  connections  already  made.  And  that  is  nothing  else 
than  what  was  found  above:  if  two  syllable-combinations — I, 
3,  5  .  .  .  and  2,  4,  6  .  .  .  — are  frequently  asso- 
ciated in  consciousness  (the  learning  of  the  original  series)  then 
the  subsequent  learning  of  the  second  combination  (derived 
series  II,  IV,  VI)  soon  after  the  learning  of  the  first  (derived 
series  I,  III,  V)  has  considerably  less  resistance  to  overcome 
than  the  latter.  A  certain  strengthening  of  associations  takes  — >v 
place,  not  only  directly,  through  conscious  repetition  of  the  asso- 
ciated members,  but  also  indirectly  through  the  conscious  repe-  / 
tition  of  other  members  with  which  the  first  had  been  frequently^ 
connected. 

This  way  of  viewing  the  matter  is  a  consequence  of  the  as- 
sumption (which  became  necessary  above,  p.  109)  of  the  forma- 
tion of  associative  connections  over  more  intervening  members 
than  could  be  comprehended  in  one  clearly  conscious  act.  These 
connections  would  be  very  fruitful  in  the  explanation  of  many 
surprising  phenomena  of  memory  and  recollection,  but  on  ac- 
count of  the  uncertainty  of  their  experiential  basis  I  refrain  for 
the  present  from  pursuing  them  further. 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY 


LB 

1063 

E213 


Ebbinghaus,  Hermann 
Memory